Mcm3320 Servico 2012 Ingles

Service Manual
Control
MCM3320
SYNC1320
English
Original Instructions
5-2012
A029Y787 (Issue 1)
Table of Contents
1. IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS .......................................................................................
1.1 Warning, Caution and Note Styles Used In This Manual .......................................................
1.2 General Safety Precautions....................................................................................................
1.3 High Ambient Temperatures ...................................................................................................
1.4 Equipment Safety Code ..........................................................................................................
1.5 Moving Parts Can Cause Severe Personal Injury Or Death ..................................................
1.6 Electrical Shock Can Cause Severe Personal Injury Or Death..............................................
1.7 Medium Voltage Equipment (601 V to 15 kV) ........................................................................
1.8 Multiple Sources of Electrical Power ......................................................................................
1.9 Do Not Tip the Equipment ......................................................................................................
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
2
3
3
2. INTRODUCTION............................................................................................................................
2.1 Training Required for Service .................................................................................................
2.2 Tools Required for Service .....................................................................................................
2.3 About This Manual..................................................................................................................
2.3.1 Organization of This Manual ........................................................................................
2.4 About the MCM3320...............................................................................................................
2.4.1 SYNC1320 ...................................................................................................................
2.4.2 Codes and Standards ..................................................................................................
2.5 How to Obtain Service ............................................................................................................
2.6 Schedule of Abbreviations ......................................................................................................
5
5
5
5
6
6
6
7
7
7
3. BASIC CONCEPTS........................................................................................................................
3.1 System Topology ....................................................................................................................
3.1.1 Topologies....................................................................................................................
3.1.2 Typical System Components (Isolated Bus Without Generator Set Main
Breaker) .......................................................................................................................
3.1.3 Typical System Components (Isolated Bus with Generator Set Main Breaker) ........
3.1.4 Typical System Components (Common Bus) ............................................................
3.1.5 Typical System Components (Transfer Pair) .............................................................
3.1.6 Master Synchronize Only...........................................................................................
3.1.7 Component Mode.......................................................................................................
3.2 Transition Type .....................................................................................................................
3.2.1 Open Transition..........................................................................................................
3.2.2 Soft-closed Transition ................................................................................................
3.2.3 Hard-closed Transition...............................................................................................
3.2.4 PTC Operating Transition Type .................................................................................
3.3 System State.........................................................................................................................
3.4 Generator Set Availability State............................................................................................
3.5 Total Number of Generator Sets Online ...............................................................................
3.6 Total Online Capacity............................................................................................................
3.7 Total Load Demand Online Capacity....................................................................................
3.8 Override Enable and Override Command ............................................................................
9
9
9
A029Y787 (Issue 1)
10
11
12
13
13
13
14
14
14
14
14
14
14
15
15
15
15
i
Table of Contents
5-2012
3.9 Summary of Settings (Basic Concepts) ................................................................................
16
4. COMPONENTS............................................................................................................................
4.1 MCM3320 Base Board..........................................................................................................
4.1.1 Hardware Version ......................................................................................................
4.1.2 Summary of Connections...........................................................................................
4.1.3 CT1-CT6 Connections ...............................................................................................
4.1.4 J14 Connections ........................................................................................................
4.1.5 TB1 Connections........................................................................................................
4.1.6 TB2 Connections........................................................................................................
4.1.7 TB3 Connections........................................................................................................
4.1.8 TB6 Connections........................................................................................................
4.1.9 TB7 Connections........................................................................................................
4.1.10 TB8 Connections......................................................................................................
4.1.11 TB9 Connections......................................................................................................
4.1.12 TB10 Connections....................................................................................................
4.1.13 TB15 Connections....................................................................................................
4.1.14 Power-down Mode ...................................................................................................
4.1.15 System and Diagnostic Indicators............................................................................
4.1.16 Repairing Circuit Boards ..........................................................................................
4.2 SYNC1320 Base Board ........................................................................................................
4.2.1 Summary of Connections...........................................................................................
4.2.2 TB1 Connections........................................................................................................
4.2.3 TB2 Connections........................................................................................................
4.2.4 TB3 Connections........................................................................................................
4.2.5 TB6 Connections........................................................................................................
4.2.6 TB7 Connections........................................................................................................
4.2.7 TB9 Connections........................................................................................................
4.2.8 TB10 Connections......................................................................................................
4.2.9 TB15 Connections......................................................................................................
4.2.10 Power-down Mode ...................................................................................................
4.2.11 System and Diagnostic Indicators............................................................................
4.3 Operator Panel......................................................................................................................
4.3.1 Back Panel.................................................................................................................
4.3.2 Front Panel.................................................................................................................
4.3.3 Compatible Software Versions (Operator Panel).......................................................
4.3.4 Main Screen...............................................................................................................
4.3.5 Levels of Security.......................................................................................................
4.4 Supplementary Interface Device (SID) .................................................................................
4.4.1 Generator Sets by SID...............................................................................................
4.4.2 Loads by SID .............................................................................................................
4.4.3 SID Required..............................................................................................................
4.4.4 Legacy SID Override (Before V2.00) .........................................................................
4.4.5 Compatible Software Versions (AUX 101).................................................................
4.4.6 Configuring the AUX 101 and AUX 102 with the MCM3320 .....................................
17
17
17
18
18
19
20
21
23
24
25
25
26
28
29
32
32
33
34
34
35
36
37
38
39
39
41
42
42
43
44
45
45
46
47
47
49
50
51
51
51
51
52
52
ii
A029Y787 (Issue 1)
5-2012
Table of Contents
4.4.7 Summary of Monitor Points (AUX 101/102)...............................................................

4.4.8 AUX 101 Board ..........................................................................................................
4.4.9 AUX 102 Board ..........................................................................................................
4.4.10 Troubleshooting .......................................................................................................
4.4.11 Connecting to an AUX 101 or AUX 102 Using InPower ..........................................
4.5 Bar Graphs............................................................................................................................
4.5.1 Generator Set Bus Current Percentage.....................................................................
4.5.2 Utility Current Percentage..........................................................................................
4.5.3 Utility Total kW Percentage........................................................................................
4.5.4 Compatible Software Versions (Bar Graph) ..............................................................
4.5.5 Setting up a Bar Graph ..............................................................................................
4.6 Universal Annunciator...........................................................................................................
4.6.1 Compatible Software Versions (Universal Annunciator) ............................................
4.6.2 Basic Status Annunciator...........................................................................................
4.6.3 Load Add/Shed Annunciator ......................................................................................
4.6.4 Setting up an Annunciator Using the Operator Panel................................................
52
53
59
63
64
64
64
64
64
64
64
64
66
66
66
69
73
5. SOURCE AVAILABILITY .............................................................................................................

5.1 Power Transfer Control (PTC) Sensors................................................................................
5.1.1 Generator Set Undervoltage Sensor..........................................................................
5.1.2 Generator Set Overvoltage Sensor............................................................................
5.1.3 Generator Set Frequency Sensor ..............................................................................
5.1.4 Generator Set Loss of Phase Sensor ........................................................................
5.1.5 Generator Set Phase Rotation Sensor ......................................................................
5.1.6 Utility Undervoltage Sensor .......................................................................................
5.1.7 Utility Overvoltage Sensor .........................................................................................
5.1.8 Utility Frequency Sensor............................................................................................
5.1.9 Utility Loss of Phase Sensor......................................................................................
5.1.10 Utility Phase Rotation Sensor ..................................................................................
5.2 Generator Set Availability .....................................................................................................
5.2.1 Generator Set Availability (Three-phase Applications in Isolated Bus Without
Generator Set Main Breaker and Common Bus Topologies)......................................
5.2.2 Generator Set Availability (Three-phase Applications in Isolated Bus with
Generator Set Main Breaker and Transfer Pair Topologies).......................................
5.2.3 Generator Set Online Capacity Sensor .....................................................................
5.3 Utility Availability ...................................................................................................................
5.3.1 Utility Availability (Three-phase Applications in Common Bus and Transfer Pair
Topologies) ..................................................................................................................
5.3.2 Utility Source Failure Switch ......................................................................................
5.4 Current Based Breaker Position ...........................................................................................
5.5 Summary of Settings (Source Availability)............................................................................
75
75
75
76
77
79
79
79
80
81
83
83
83
6. POWER TRANSFER CONTROL (PTC) STATE .........................................................................

6.1 Generator Sets Connected ...................................................................................................
6.1.1 Connecting the Generator Sets .................................................................................
6.1.2 Disconnecting the Generator Sets .............................................................................
87
87
87
87
A029Y787 (Issue 1)
83
84
84
84
84
85
85
85
iii
Table of Contents
5-2012
6.1.3 Generator Set Connections and Legacy SID Override..............................................

6.1.4 Generator Set Breaker Inhibit ....................................................................................
6.2 Utility Connected...................................................................................................................
6.2.1 Connecting the Utility .................................................................................................
6.2.2 Disconnecting the Utility.............................................................................................
6.2.3 Utility Main Breaker Inhibit .........................................................................................
6.3 Summary of Settings (PTC State) ........................................................................................
88
88
88
88
88
88
89
7. POWER TRANSFER CONTROL (PTC) OPERATING MODE ....................................................

7.1 PTC Logic and Source Availability........................................................................................
7.2 Priority of PTC Operating Modes..........................................................................................
7.3 Utility Fail ..............................................................................................................................
7.3.1 Conditions for Entering Utility Fail..............................................................................
7.3.2 Utility Source Failure Switch ......................................................................................
7.3.3 Conditions for Leaving Utility Fail ..............................................................................
7.4 Normal Override....................................................................................................................
7.4.1 Conditions for Entering Normal Override ...................................................................
7.4.2 Conditions for Leaving Normal Override....................................................................
7.5 Extended Parallel..................................................................................................................
7.5.1 Conditions for Entering Extended Parallel .................................................................
7.5.2 Extended Parallel Switch ...........................................................................................
7.5.3 Conditions for Leaving Extended Parallel..................................................................
7.6 Test .......................................................................................................................................
7.6.1 Conditions for Entering Test ......................................................................................
7.6.2 Test Start Switch........................................................................................................
7.6.3 Conditions for Leaving Test .......................................................................................
7.7 Normal ..................................................................................................................................
7.7.1 Conditions for Entering Normal..................................................................................
7.7.2 Conditions for Leaving Normal...................................................................................
7.8 Summary of Settings (PTC Operating Mode) .......................................................................
91
91
91
91
91
91
92
92
93
93
93
93
93
93
94
94
94
94
95
95
95
95
8. BREAKER CONTROL..................................................................................................................
8.1 PTC Transfer Pair Operating Mode ......................................................................................
8.2 Breaker Control in Manual ....................................................................................................
8.3 Breaker Control in Utility Fail ................................................................................................
8.4 Breaker Control in Normal Override .....................................................................................
8.5 Breaker Control in Extended Parallel....................................................................................
8.6 Breaker Control in Test.........................................................................................................
8.6.1 Test with Load Command ........................................................................................
8.7 Breaker Control in Normal ..................................................................................................
8.7.1 Open-transition Retransfer After Fail To Synchronize .............................................
8.8 Timers .................................................................................................................................
8.8.1 Transfer Time Delay ................................................................................................
8.8.2 Retransfer Time Delay .............................................................................................
8.8.3 Programmed Transition Time Delay ........................................................................
8.8.4 Maximum Parallel Timer ..........................................................................................
8.8.5 Summary of Settings (PTC Timers) .........................................................................
97
97
97
97
98
99
99
101
101
103
103
103
104
104
104
104
iv
A029Y787 (Issue 1)
5-2012
Table of Contents
8.9 Inhibits.................................................................................................................................
8.9.1 Master Inhibit............................................................................................................
8.9.2 Transfer Inhibit .........................................................................................................
8.9.3 Retransfer Inhibit......................................................................................................
8.9.4 Override Switch........................................................................................................
8.9.5 Generator Set Breaker Inhibit ..................................................................................
8.9.6 Utility Main Breaker Inhibit .......................................................................................
8.10 Fail to Disconnect Enable .................................................................................................
8.11 Output Signals for Breakers..............................................................................................
8.12 Summary of Settings (Breaker Control)............................................................................
104
104
105
105
106
106
107
107
107
108
9. GENERATOR SET CONTROL ..................................................................................................

9.1 PTC Generator Set Operating Mode ..................................................................................
9.2 Generator Set Control in Utility Fail, Extended Parallel, and Test......................................
9.3 Generator Set Control in Normal Override .........................................................................
9.4 Generator Set Control in Normal ........................................................................................
9.5 Start Delay ..........................................................................................................................
9.6 Stop Delay ..........................................................................................................................
9.7 Summary of Settings (Generator Set Control)....................................................................
111
111
111
111
111
111
112
112
10. LOAD CONTROL .....................................................................................................................

10.1 Associated Pins ................................................................................................................
10.2 Extended Parallel..............................................................................................................
10.2.1 Conditions for Load Control in Extended Parallel ..................................................
10.2.2 kW Control .............................................................................................................
10.2.3 kVAR Control .........................................................................................................
10.2.4 Extended Parallel Ramp Load Time ......................................................................
10.2.5 Open-loop Methods and Closed-loop Methods .....................................................
10.2.6 Load Ramping During Extended Parallel...............................................................
10.2.7 Summary of Settings (kW Load Control) ...............................................................
10.2.8 Summary of Settings (kVAR Load Control) ...........................................................
10.3 Soft-closed Transition .......................................................................................................
10.3.1 Load Control During Soft-closed Transitions .........................................................
10.4 Load Control at Other Times ............................................................................................
10.5 Load Control Output Enable by Hardware Version ..........................................................
10.5.1 Code 1534 - Load Control Output Event ...............................................................
113
113
113
113
114
117
118
119
120
121
123
126
126
126
126
127
11. SYNCHRONIZER .....................................................................................................................

11.1 Synchronizer Status..........................................................................................................
11.1.1 Fail to Synchronize Lockout Enable ......................................................................
11.1.2 Master Inhibit..........................................................................................................
11.2 Frequency Matching .........................................................................................................
11.2.1 Phase Match ..........................................................................................................
11.2.2 Slip Frequency .......................................................................................................
11.2.3 Proportional-integral (PI) Loop...............................................................................
11.3 Voltage Match ...................................................................................................................
11.3.1 Voltage Match Test Offset .....................................................................................
129
129
129
129
130
130
130
130
131
131
A029Y787 (Issue 1)
Table of Contents
5-2012
11.3.2 kVAR Load Share Protection and Voltage Match Fail...........................................

11.3.3 Proportional-integral (PI) Loop...............................................................................
11.4 Synchronizer Check Close Allowed..................................................................................
11.4.1 Permissive Close Allowed......................................................................................
11.5 Summary of Settings (Synchronizer) ................................................................................
132
132
133
133
133
12. LOAD ADD/SHED ....................................................................................................................

12.1 Load Add/Shed Enable .....................................................................................................
12.2 Loads by SID ....................................................................................................................
12.2.1 Unavailable SID and Load Add/Shed ....................................................................
12.3 Load-add Levels ...............................................................................................................
12.4 Load-shed Levels..............................................................................................................
12.5 Load Add and the Generator Set Main Breaker ...............................................................
12.6 Load Add Shed Operating State.......................................................................................
12.7 Automatic Load Add..........................................................................................................
12.7.1 Required Online Capacity ......................................................................................
12.7.2 Conditions for Automatic Load Add .......................................................................
12.7.3 Automatic Load Add and Legacy SID Override .....................................................
12.8 Automatic Load Shed........................................................................................................
12.8.1 Conditions for Automatic Load Shed .....................................................................
12.8.2 Automatic Load Shed During Open-transition Transfers .......................................
12.8.3 Open Transition Retransfer Load Shed .................................................................
12.9 Conditions for Manual Load Add/Shed .............................................................................
12.10 Utility Load Add...............................................................................................................
12.10.1 Conditions for Utility Load Add ............................................................................
12.11 Maximum Number of Loads by Firmware Version .........................................................
12.12 Output Signals for Feeder Breakers ...............................................................................
12.13 Output Signals for Automatic Transfer Switches (ATS)..................................................
12.14 Summary of Settings (Load Add/Share) .........................................................................
137
137
137
137
137
137
137
138
138
139
139
140
140
140
141
141
141
141
141
142
142
142
143
13. LOAD DEMAND .......................................................................................................................

13.1 Load Demand Enable .......................................................................................................
13.2 Generator Sets by SID......................................................................................................
13.2.1 Unavailable SID and Load Demand ......................................................................
13.3 Generator Set Support for Load Demand in Extended Parallel .......................................
13.4 Initial Time Delay ..............................................................................................................
13.5 When a Generator Set Is Shut Down ...............................................................................
13.5.1 Shutdown Percentage............................................................................................
13.5.2 Shutdown Threshold ..............................................................................................
13.5.3 Shutdown Percentage or Shutdown Threshold .....................................................
13.5.4 Shutdown Delay .....................................................................................................
13.5.5 Minimum Online Capacity ......................................................................................
13.6 When a Generator Set Is Restarted .................................................................................
13.6.1 Restart Percentage ................................................................................................
13.6.2 Relationship Between Shutdown Percentage and Restart Percentage.................
13.6.3 Restart Threshold...................................................................................................
13.6.4 Relationship Between Shutdown Threshold and Restart Threshold .....................
145
145
145
145
145
146
146
146
146
146
147
147
147
147
148
148
149
vi
A029Y787 (Issue 1)
5-2012
Table of Contents
13.6.5 Restart Delay .........................................................................................................

13.7 Which Generator Set Shuts Down or Restarts .................................................................
13.7.1 Fixed Sequence Method ........................................................................................
13.7.2 Example: Fixed Sequence Method ........................................................................
13.7.3 Setting a Fixed Sequence in InPower....................................................................
13.7.4 Run Hours Method.................................................................................................
13.7.5 Source of Run Hours for the Run Hours Method...................................................
13.7.6 Example: Run Hours Method.................................................................................
13.7.7 Generator Set Online Time ....................................................................................
13.7.8 Generator Set Fail Time.........................................................................................
13.8 Load Demand and Generator Set Overload .....................................................................
13.9 Summary of Settings (Load Demand) ..............................................................................
149
150
150
150
151
151
151
152
153
153
153
153
14. SCHEDULER............................................................................................................................
14.1 Real-time Clock.................................................................................................................
14.1.1 Daylight Saving Time .............................................................................................
14.1.2 Daylight Saving Time Enable.................................................................................
14.1.3 Summary of Settings (Real-time Clock).................................................................
14.1.4 Code 1689 - Real-time Clock Power Interrupt .......................................................
14.1.5 Effects of Code 1689 .............................................................................................
14.2 Scheduler Enable..............................................................................................................
14.2.1 Automatic Changes of System Scheduler Enable .................................................
14.3 Scheduled Programs ........................................................................................................
14.4 Exceptions ........................................................................................................................
14.5 Scheduler Specifications...................................................................................................
14.6 Summary of Settings (Scheduler).....................................................................................
157
157
157
157
158
158
158
158
159
159
159
160
161
15. MANUAL MODE .......................................................................................................................

15.1 Conditions for Entering Manual Mode ..............................................................................
15.2 Conditions for Leaving Manual Mode ...............................................................................
15.3 Auto/Manual Switch ..........................................................................................................
15.4 Monitoring Breaker Position in Manual Mode ...................................................................
15.5 Commit to Transfer in Manual Mode ................................................................................
15.6 Breaker Control in Manual Mode ......................................................................................
15.6.1 Programmed Transition Time Delay ......................................................................
15.6.2 Maximum Parallel Timer in Manual Mode .............................................................
15.6.3 Master Inhibit..........................................................................................................
15.6.4 Generator Set Breaker Inhibit ................................................................................
15.6.5 Utility Main Breaker Inhibit .....................................................................................
15.6.6 Fail to Disconnect Enable ......................................................................................
15.7 Generator Set Control in Manual Mode ............................................................................
15.8 Load Control in Manual Mode...........................................................................................
15.8.1 Load Control at Other Times .................................................................................
15.9 Synchronizer Status in Manual Mode ...............................................................................
15.9.1 Synchronizer Enable Switch ..................................................................................
15.10 Load Add/Shed in Manual Mode ....................................................................................
15.11 Load Demand in Manual Mode.......................................................................................
163
163
163
163
163
163
164
164
164
164
165
165
166
166
166
166
166
166
167
167
A029Y787 (Issue 1)
vii
Table of Contents
5-2012
15.12 Scheduler in Manual Mode .............................................................................................

15.13 Summary of Settings (Manual Mode) .............................................................................
167
167
16. MASTER SYNCHRONIZE ONLY.............................................................................................

16.1 Generator Set Availability (Three-phase Applications in Master Synchronize Only or
Component Mode)...............................................................................................................
16.2 Utility Availability (Three-phase Applications in Master Synchronize Only and
Component Mode)...............................................................................................................
16.3 PTC State and PTC Operating Mode in Master Synchronize Only..................................
16.4 Synchronizer Status in Master Synchronize Only and Component Mode........................
16.6 Synchronizer Check in Master Synchronize Only or Component Mode ..........................
169
169
169
169
169
170
170
17. SYNC1320................................................................................................................................
17.1 Generator Set Availability (Single-phase Applications) ....................................................
17.2 Utility Availability (Single-phase Applications) ..................................................................
17.3 Synchronizer in the SYNC1320 ........................................................................................
171
171
171
171
18. COMPONENT MODE...............................................................................................................

18.1 Generator Set Availability (Three-phase Applications in Master Synchronize Only or
Component Mode)...............................................................................................................
18.2 Utility Availability (Three-phase Applications in Master Synchronize Only and
Component Mode)...............................................................................................................
18.3 PTC State and PTC Operating Mode in Component Mode .............................................
18.4 Synchronizer Status in Master Synchronize Only and Component Mode........................
18.6 Synchronizer Check in Master Synchronize Only or Component Mode ..........................
18.7 Load Control in Component Mode....................................................................................
18.8 Load Control Based on PTC State and PTC Operating Mode .........................................
18.9 Load Control in Manual Mode...........................................................................................
173
173
173
173
173
174
174
174
175
175
19. TROUBLESHOOTING..............................................................................................................
19.1 Events ...............................................................................................................................
19.1.1 Code 1222 - Not in Automatic................................................................................
19.1.2 Code 1483 - Common Alarm .................................................................................
19.1.3 Code 1534 - Load Control Output Event ...............................................................
19.1.4 Code 1916 - Synchronized Event ..........................................................................
19.1.5 Code 2328 - Utility Bus Available Event ................................................................
19.1.6 Code 2332 - Utility Bus Connected Event .............................................................
19.1.7 Code 2333 - Generator Set Bus Connected Event ...............................................
19.1.8 Code 2779 - Utility Unloaded Event.......................................................................
19.1.9 Code 2781 - Genset Unloaded Event....................................................................
19.1.10 Code 2965 - Generator Set Bus Available Event ................................................
19.1.11 Code 2971 - Test/Extended Parallel Event..........................................................
19.1.12 Code 3226 - Genset Bus Base Load Event.........................................................
19.1.13 Code 3227 - Utility Peak Shave Event.................................................................
177
177
177
177
177
177
177
177
177
177
177
178
178
178
178
viii
169
173
A029Y787 (Issue 1)
5-2012
Table of Contents
19.2 Faults ................................................................................................................................

19.2.1 Fault Reset.............................................................................................................
19.2.2 System Lockout Status ..........................................................................................
19.2.3 Conditions for System Lockout Status...................................................................
19.3 Troubleshooting Procedures.............................................................................................
19.3.1 No Code - AUX 101 Does Not Communicate........................................................
19.3.2 No Code - Fault Codes Do Not Reset ...................................................................
19.3.3 No Code - Incorrect Generator Set Bus Metering .................................................
19.3.4 No Code - Incorrect Utility Metering.......................................................................
19.3.5 No Code - Operator Panel Is Not Communicating ................................................
19.3.6 Code 343 - Hardware Failure MCM3320...............................................................
19.3.7 Code 353 - EEPROM Write Error ..........................................................................
19.3.8 Code 441 - Low Battery Voltage............................................................................
19.3.9 Code 442 - High Battery Voltage ...........................................................................
19.3.10 Code 1121 - Fail to Disconnect ...........................................................................
19.3.11 Code 1219 - Utility Main Breaker Tripped............................................................
19.3.12 Code 1223 - Utility Bus Frequency ......................................................................
19.3.13 Code 1224 - Generator Set Bus Over Voltage ....................................................
19.3.14 Code 1225 - Generator Set Bus Under Voltage ..................................................
19.3.15 Code 1226 - Generator Set Bus Frequency ........................................................
19.3.16 Code 1328 - Generator Set Main Breaker Tripped..............................................
19.3.17 Code 1335 - AC Metering Out of Range .............................................................
19.3.18 Code 1444 - Generator Set Bus Overload...........................................................
19.3.19 Code 1452 - Generator Set Main Breaker Fail to Close (Isolated Bus Without
Generator Set Main Breaker or Common Bus) .........................................................
19.3.20 Code 1452 - Generator Set Main Breaker Fail to Close (Isolated Bus with
Generator Set Main Breaker or Transfer Pair) ..........................................................
19.3.21 Code 1453 - Generator Set Main Breaker Fail to Open (Isolated Bus Without
Generator Set Main Breaker or Common Bus) .........................................................
19.3.22 Code 1453 - Generator Set Main Breaker Fail to Open (Isolated Bus with
Generator Set Main Breaker or Transfer Pair) ..........................................................
19.3.23 Code 1454 - Generator Set Main Breaker Position Contact................................
19.3.24 Code 1455 - Utility Main Breaker Position Contact (Isolated Bus Without
Generator Set Main Breaker or Isolated Bus with Generator Set Main Breaker) .....
19.3.25 Code 1455 - Utility Main Breaker Position Contact (Common Bus or Transfer
Pair) ...........................................................................................................................
19.3.26 Code 1456 - Synchronizer Output Limit...............................................................
19.3.27 Code 1457 - Fail to Synchronize Warning ...........................................................
19.3.28 Code 1458 - Synchronizer Phase Rotation Mismatch .........................................
19.3.29 Code 1541 - Generator Set Failed to Come Online ............................................
19.3.30 Code 1689 - Real-time Clock Power Interrupt .....................................................
19.3.31 Code 1912 - Utility Bus Loss of Phase ................................................................
19.3.32 Code 1913 - Generator Set Bus Loss of Phase ..................................................
19.3.33 Code 1914 - Utility Bus Phase Rotation ..............................................................
19.3.34 Code 1915 - Generator Set Bus Phase Rotation ................................................
19.3.35 Code 1989 - kW Load Control Output Limit.........................................................
19.3.36 Code 1991 - kVAR Load Control Output Limit.....................................................
A029Y787 (Issue 1)
178
178
178
179
179
179
180
180
181
181
182
182
183
184
185
185
186
188
191
193
195
196
198
200
201
203
204
205
207
208
210
211
212
214
215
215
217
218
219
221
222
ix
Table of Contents
19.3.37
19.3.38
19.3.39
19.3.40
19.3.41
19.3.42
19.3.43
19.3.44
19.3.45
19.3.46
19.3.47
5-2012
Maximum Parallel Time ..................................................................

Utility Bus Under Voltage ................................................................
Utility Bus Over Voltage ..................................................................
Utility Main Breaker Fail to Close....................................................
Utility Main Breaker Fail to Open ....................................................
Calibration Checksum.....................................................................
Load Demand Setup Warning.........................................................
Remote I/O Comm Failure Warning ...............................................
Modbus Communication Failure Warning.......................................
Utility Reverse kW Fault..................................................................
Advanced Grid Protection Fault ......................................................
223
224
226
228
230
232
233
234
235
236
236
20. PARTS LIST .............................................................................................................................
239
21. MANUFACTURING FACILITIES ..............................................................................................

21.1 How to Obtain Service ......................................................................................................
241
241
APPENDIX A. INTERCONNECT DRAWINGS ...............................................................................

A.1 0630-3133 (MCM3320 Interconnect Drawing) ...................................................................
A.2 0630-3136 (SYNC1320 Interconnect Drawing)..................................................................
243
245
273
APPENDIX B. SEQUENCE DIAGRAMS ........................................................................................

B.1 Sequence Diagrams ...........................................................................................................
277
279
Code
Code
Code
Code
Code
Code
Code
Code
Code
Code
Code
1999
2331
2358
2396
2397
2416
2647
2648
2939
3924
4137
A029Y787 (Issue 1)
Important Safety Instructions

SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS - This manual contains important instructions that should be
followed during installation, operation, and maintenance of the equipment.
Safe and efficient operation can be achieved only if the equipment is properly operated
and maintained. Many accidents are caused by failure to follow fundamental rules and
precautions.
1.1
Warning, Caution and Note Styles Used In This

Manual
The following safety styles and symbols found throughout this manual indicate potentially
hazardous conditions to the operator, service personnel or the equipment.
DANGER: Warns of a hazard that will result in severe personal injury or death .
WARNING: Warns of a hazard that may result in severe personal injury or death .
CAUTION: Warns of a hazard or an unsafe practice that can result in product or property
damage .
NOTE:
1.2
A short piece of text giving information that augments the current text .
General Safety Precautions

Keep multi-class ABC fire extinguishers handy. Class A fires involve ordinary combustible
materials such as wood and cloth; Class B fires involve combustible and flammable liquid
fuels and gaseous fuels; Class C fires involve live electrical equipment. (ref. NFPA No. 10).
Keep the equipment and the surrounding area clean and free from obstructions. Prevent
materials from accumulating under the product. Remove any unused equipment, and keep
the floor clean and dry.
Do not store any flammable liquids, such as fuel, cleaners, oil, etc., near the equipment. A
fire or explosion could result.
Do not work on this equipment when mentally or physically fatigued, or after consuming
any alcohol or drug that makes the operation of equipment unsafe.
Make sure all guards, fasteners, supports, doors, and panels are in place and secure.
Use appropriate personal protective equipment, such as safety glasses, gloves, and
footwear when working with this equipment.
1.3
High Ambient Temperatures

WARNING: In the presence of high ambient temperatures, some surfaces may become
hot. Contact with hot surfaces may cause burns resulting in personal injury.
Make sure you are wearing appropriate personal protective equipment before
touching the equipment.
A029Y787 (Issue 1)
1. Important Safety Instructions
1.4
5-2012
Equipment Safety Code

Before operating the equipment, read the manuals and become familiar with them and the
equipment. Safe and efficient operation can be achieved only if the equipment is properly
operated and maintained. Many accidents are caused by failure to follow fundamental rules
and precautions.
WARNING: Improper operation and maintenance can lead to severe personal injury or
loss of life and property. Read and follow all Safety Precautions, Warnings
and Cautions throughout this manual and the documentation supplied with
your equipment.
WARNING: Lifting and repositioning of the equipment must only be carried out using
suitable lifting equipment, shackles, and spreader bars, in accordance with
local guidelines and legislation, by suitably trained and experienced
personnel. Incorrect lifting can result in severe personal injury, death and/or
equipment damage. For more information, contact your authorized
distributor.
1.5
Moving Parts Can Cause Severe Personal Injury Or

Death
Keep your hands, clothing, and jewelry away from moving parts.
Make sure that fasteners on the equipment are secure. Tighten supports and clamps; keep
guards in position.
Do not wear loose clothing or jewelry in the vicinity of moving parts or while working on
electrical equipment. Loose clothing and jewelry can become caught in moving parts.
1.6
Electrical Shock Can Cause Severe Personal Injury

Or Death
Remove electric power before removing protective shields or touching electrical
equipment. Use rubber insulative mats placed on dry wood platforms over floors that are
metal or concrete when around electrical equipment. Do not wear damp clothing
(particularly wet shoes) or allow skin surface to be damp when handling electrical
equipment. Do not wear jewelry. Jewelry can short out electrical contacts and cause shock
or burning.
Use extreme caution when working on electrical components. High voltages can cause
injury or death. DO NOT tamper with interlocks.
Follow all applicable state and local electrical codes. Have all electrical installations
performed by a qualified licensed electrician. Tag and lock open switches to avoid
accidental closure.
1.7
Medium Voltage Equipment (601 V to 15 kV)

Medium voltage acts differently than low voltage. Special equipment and training is
required to work on or around medium voltage equipment. Operation and maintenance
must be done only by persons trained and experienced to work on such devices. Improper
use or procedures will result in severe personal injury or death.
A029Y787 (Issue 1)
5-2012
Do not work on energized equipment. Unauthorized personnel must not be permitted near
energized equipment. Due to the nature of medium voltage electrical equipment, induced
voltage remains even after the equipment is disconnected from the power source. Plan the
time for maintenance with authorized personnel so that the equipment can be de-energized
and safely grounded.
1.8
Multiple Sources of Electrical Power

WARNING: The equipment may have more than one source of electrical energy.
Disconnecting one source without disconnecting the others presents a
shock hazard that can result in severe personal injury or death. Before
working on the equipment, disconnect all sources of electrical energy, and
verify that all sources of electrical energy have been removed.
1.9
Do Not Tip the Equipment
WARNING: Tipping equipment can cause equipment damage, personal injury, or death.
Keep the equipment on a level surface, make sure guards and fasteners are
in place, and do not tip the equipment.
A029Y787 (Issue 1)
5-2012
This page is intentionally blank.
A029Y787 (Issue 1)
Introduction
2.1
Training Required for Service

WARNING: Many troubleshooting procedures or replacement of parts present hazards
that can result in equipment damage and severe personal injury or death.
Only trained and experienced service personnel with knowledge of fuels,
electricity, and machinery hazards should perform service procedures.
Review the Safety Precautions section of this manual.
Only qualified service technicians with the appropriate personal protective equipment should
work on the equipment. Contact your authorized distributor for more information about becoming
a qualified service technician.
In addition, you should have the following knowledge about the site.
A basic understanding of the power distribution system at your site
A basic understanding of the loads at your site
Knowledge of the codes and standards that are applicable at your site
The licenses required to perform the work at your site
In addition, read all of the manuals provided with the product and other equipment in the power
distribution system, such as generator sets, automatic transfer switches, and circuit breakers.
You should be familiar with the warnings and operating procedures. Contact your authorized
distributor for more information regarding related literature for this product or for equipment in
the power distribution system.
2.2
Tools Required for Service

Personal protective equipment
True RMS meter for accurate measurement of small AC and DC voltages
Phase rotation meter
Tools for stripping and connecting wires
InPowerTM (PC-based service tool)
ModScan (or other tools for monitoring Modbus networks)
Any tools required for local codes and standards
2.3
About This Manual

This manual provides information to help you service the MCM3320 safely and correctly.
Hardware
Main features
Troubleshooting codes and symptoms
Engineering drawings and sequence diagrams
A029Y787 (Issue 1)
2. Introduction
5-2012
This manual does not provide information about operation, installation, or warranty. It also does
not provide information about other components in the power distribution system. Contact your
distributor for any of this information.
2.3.1
Organization of This Manual

Chapter 1 through Chapter 3 provide important information for all readers.
Chapter 4 provides information about the hardware.
Chapter 5 through Chapter 14 describe the main features of the MCM3320 when it acts
as a master paralleling control. These chapters apply when the topology is Isolated Bus
Without Generator Set Main Breaker, Isolated Bus with Generator Set Main Breaker,
Common Bus, or Transfer Pair and when the MCM3320 is running in Auto mode.
Chapter 15 through Chapter 18 discuss the differences in the MCM3320 when the
topology is Master Synchronize Only or Component Mode or when the MCM3320 is
running in Manual mode. It also introduces the SYNC1320 by comparing it to the
MCM3320.
Chapter 19 and Chapter 20 provide basic troubleshooting and parts information.
The appendices provide engineering drawings and sequence diagrams for reference.
2.4
About the MCM3320

The MCM3320 (Master Control Module) is a master paralleling control. It is designed to manage
power distribution systems with:
Paralleling generator sets from Cummins Power Generation
Multiple loads
To manage these systems, the MCM3320 has features such as breaker control, generator set
start/stop, load control, synchronizing, load add/shed, and load demand.
Alternatively, the MCM3320 can be used as a component in more complex systems. As a
component, the MCM3320 offers synchronizing and load control.
2.4.1
SYNC1320
The SYNC1320 is a MCM3320 in which the topology is Master Synchronize Only.
The SYNC1320 base board is a depopulated MCM3320 base board. Depopulation reduces the
capabilities of the SYNC1320 compared to a MCM3320 in Master Synchronize Only.
No current sensing
No Modbus connections
No PCCNet connections, including the operator panel
Starting with software version 1.29, the SYNC1320 can be used in single-phase applications as
well as three-phase applications. This has an impact on the synchronizer, which only supports
three-phase applications in the MCM3320. In addition, when the SYNC1320 is used in singlephase applications, source availability is different.
See 0900-0662 for more information about the SYNC1320.
A029Y787 (Issue 1)
5-2012
2. Introduction
2.4.2
Codes and Standards

The MCM3320 meets or exceeds the requirements of these codes and standards.
UL508 recognized
CE Mark
EN 61000-2
EN 61000-4
ISO 7637, pulses #2, 3a, 3b, 5, 7
The MCM3320 is designed and manufactured in ISO9001-certified facilities.
2.5
How to Obtain Service

When a product requires servicing, contact your nearest Cummins Power Generation distributor.
To locate your local Cummins Power Generation distributor, refer to www.cumminspower.com
and select Distributor Locator. When contacting your distributor, always supply the complete
Model, Specification, and Serial Number as shown on the nameplate.
2.6
Schedule of Abbreviations
This list is not exhaustive. For example, it does not identify units of measure or acronyms that
appear only in parameters, event/fault names, or part/accessory names.
TABLE 1.
Abbreviation
SCHEDULE OF ABBREVIATIONS
Description
AC
Alternating Current
ATS
Automatic Transfer Switch
CB
Circuit Breaker
CE
Conformit Europenne
CT
Current Transformer
CSA
Canadian Standards Association
CSV
Comma-separated Values
DC
Direct Current
DHCP
Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol
DMC
Digital Master Control
DNS
Domain Name Server
FTP
File Transfer Protocol
HMI
Human-machine Interface
IEC
International Electrotechnical Commission
IP
Internet Protocol
LAN
Local Area Network
MCM
Master Control Module
A029Y787 (Issue 1)
2. Introduction
Abbreviation
Description
NAT
Network Address Translation
NEC
National Electric Code
NFPA
National Fire Protection Agency
OSHPD
PC
PCC
PT
Office of Statewide Health Planning and Development

Personal Computer
PowerCommand Control
Potential Transformer
PTC
Power Transfer Control
RMS
Root-mean Square
RSL
Recommended Spares List
RTU
Remote Terminal Unit
TCP
Transmission Control Protocol
TDEN
Time Delay Emergency to Normal
TDMP
Time Delay Maximum Parallel
TDNE
Time Delay Normal to Emergency
TDPT
Time Delay Programmed Transition
UL
5-2012
Underwriters Laboratories
UPS
Uninterruptible Power Supply
USB
Universal Serial Bus
WAN
Wide Area Network
A029Y787 (Issue 1)
Basic Concepts
3.1
System Topology
If the MCM3320 is operating as a master control, System Topology is the topology of the power
distribution system. If the MCM3320 has a different role, System Topology determines the role
the MCM3320 plays in the power distribution system.
NOTE:
3.1.1
This setting can be changed only when the MCM3320 is in Manual mode.
Topologies
A topology is based on the presence or absence of a utility main breaker and a generator set
main breaker.
TABLE 2.
TOPOLOGY BASED ON PRESENCE OF UTILITY MAIN BREAKER AND GENERATOR SET

MAIN BREAKER
Utility Main Breaker
Generator Set Main Breaker
Topology
No
No
Isolated Bus Without Generator Set

Main Breaker
No
Yes
Isolated Bus with Generator Set Main

Breaker
Yes
No
Common Bus
Yes
Yes
Transfer Pair
A029Y787 (Issue 1)
3. Basic Concepts
3.1.2
5-2012
Typical System Components (Isolated Bus Without

Generator Set Main Breaker)
No. Description
No. Description
Generator sets
Generator set bus, load bus
Generator set paralleling breakers
Feeder breakers or ATS (connected to the loads)
FIGURE 1.
10
TYPICAL SYSTEM COMPONENTS (ISOLATED BUS WITHOUT GENERATOR SET MAIN

BREAKER)
A029Y787 (Issue 1)
5-2012
3.1.3
3. Basic Concepts
Typical System Components (Isolated Bus with Generator

Set Main Breaker)
No. Description
No. Description
Generator sets
Generator set main breaker
Load bus
Generator set bus
FIGURE 2.
TYPICAL SYSTEM COMPONENTS (ISOLATED BUS WITH GENERATOR SET MAIN

BREAKER)
A029Y787 (Issue 1)
11
3. Basic Concepts
3.1.4
5-2012
Typical System Components (Common Bus)
No. Description
No. Description
Generator sets
Utility main breaker
Generator set bus, load bus
Utility
FIGURE 3.
12
TYPICAL SYSTEM COMPONENTS (COMMON BUS)
A029Y787 (Issue 1)
5-2012
3.1.5
3. Basic Concepts
Typical System Components (Transfer Pair)
No. Description
No. Description
Generator sets
Load bus
Generator set bus
Utility main breaker
Generator set main breaker
Utility
FIGURE 4.
3.1.6
TYPICAL SYSTEM COMPONENTS (TRANSFER PAIR)
Master Synchronize Only

If the topology is Master Synchronize Only, the synchronizer is available. Other features are not
active.
3.1.7
Component Mode
If the topology is Component Mode, the synchronizer and load control are available. Other
features are not active.
A029Y787 (Issue 1)
13
3. Basic Concepts
3.2
5-2012
Transition Type
Transition Type refers to the way the loads are transferred from one source to another source.
3.2.1
Open Transition
A break-before-make transfer of a load from one source to another. There will be a power
interruption.
3.2.2
Soft-closed Transition
A soft-closed transition is a make-before-break transfer of a load from one source to another.
When the second source is connected in parallel to the first, the load on the first source is
gradually reduced until it falls below a particular threshold, at which point the first source is
disconnected.
There will be no power interruption. Both sources have to be in parallel for this type of transfer.
3.2.3
Hard-closed Transition
A hard-closed transition is a make-before-break transfer of a load from one source to another.
There will be no power interruption, and the loads will not be ramped up or ramped down. Both
sources have to be in parallel for this type of transfer. The sources will be in parallel for no more
than 100 ms.
3.2.4
PTC Operating Transition Type

PTC Operating Transition Type determines how the MCM3320 is currently transferring the loads
from one source to another source. It is the same as Transition Type except in these situations.
If the topology is Isolated Bus Without Generator Set Main Breaker, Isolated Bus with
Generator Set Main Breaker, or Master Synchronize Only, PTC Operating Transition Type
is Open Transition.
If the topology is Common Bus and Transition Type is Hard Closed Transition, PTC
Operating Transition Type is Soft Closed Transition.
If PTC Operating Mode is Extended Parallel, PTC Operating Transition Type is Soft Closed
Transition.
3.3
System State
System State describes what the main purpose of the MCM3320 is at any moment. For
example, the MCM3320 may be synchronizing the generator sets with the utility, waiting for
timers to expire, running in extended parallel, in normal operation, and so on.
System State does not affect the operation of the MCM3320. It is for descriptive purposes only.
It is available over network connections, such as PCCNet, Modbus, or InPower.
3.4
Generator Set Availability State

GenX Availability State, where X identifies the generator set, identifies the current availability of
the generator set. This is used by load demand and by the annunciators.
14
A029Y787 (Issue 1)
5-2012
3. Basic Concepts
TABLE 3.
GENX AVAILABILITY STATE
State
Gen Does Not Exist
Offline
Waiting for Gen
Description
GenX kW Rating is set to 0.
The generator sets are not supposed to be running, or
this generator set has been shut down by load demand.
This generator set is starting or restarting. All of these
conditions are met.
The generator sets are running.

This generator set has not been shut down by load
demand.
The paralleling breaker of this generator is open.
3.5
Online
The paralleling breaker of this generator set is closed.
Failed
This generator set failed to come online. See code 1541.
Total Number of Generator Sets Online

Total Number of Gensets Online is the number of generator sets whose paralleling breakers
have closed.
3.6
Total Online Capacity

Total Online Capacity is the sum of the ratings of the generator sets whose paralleling breakers
are closed.
3.7
Total Load Demand Online Capacity

Total Load Demand Online Capacity includes the capacity in Total Online Capacity, plus the
sum of the ratings of the generator sets that have started or restarted but not come online yet.
This is used by load demand to avoid restarting another generator set until a previouslyrestarted generator set either closes its paralleling breaker or fails to come online.
If a generator set fails to come online (code 1541), it is not included in Total Load Demand
Online Capacity.
3.8
Override Enable and Override Command

Many settings have an override enable and an override command associated with them. If the
override enable is set to Enable, the override command becomes the effective value of the
associated setting. If the override enable is set to Disable, the override command is ignored,
and the measured value or calculated value becomes the effective value of the associated
setting.
Typically, the override enable and override command are used for testing. They may also be
available over network connections, such as PCCNet, Modbus, or InPower.
A029Y787 (Issue 1)
15
3. Basic Concepts
3.9
5-2012
Summary of Settings (Basic Concepts)

TABLE 4.
SUMMARY OF SETTINGS (BASIC CONCEPTS)
Setting
Description
System Topology
Specifies the function of the MCM3320 or the topology of

the system.
Possible values: Master Synchronize Only, Isolated Bus
w/out GM, Isolated Bus w/GM, Common Bus, Transfer
Pair, Component Mode (Default: Master Synchronize
Only)
Transition Type
Specifies the type of transition when the loads are

transferred from one source to another.
Possible values: Open Transition, Hard Closed Transition,
Soft Closed Transition (Default: Open Transition)
TABLE 5.
SUMMARY OF MONITOR POINTS (GENERATOR SET CONTROL)
Setting
Description
PTC Operating Transition Type
Indicates how the loads are currently being transferred

from one source to another source. Usually, this is the
same as Transition Type.
System State
Indicates the main purpose of the MCM3320 at any

moment. This does not affect the operation of the
MCM3320. It is for descriptive purposes only.
Possible values: Not Available, TD Start, TD Stop, TD
Programmed Transition, TD Transfer, TD Retransfer,
Synchronizing, Sync Check OK, Inhibit, Unassigned,
Ramp Unload, Ramp Load, Manual, Utility Failure, Test,
Standby, Factory Test, Extended Parallel
GenX Availability State (X = 1-16)
Indicates the current availability of the generator set. This

is used by load demand and the annunciators.
Possible values: Gen Does Not Exist, Offline, Waiting For
Gen, Online, Failed
Total Number of Gensets Online
Indicates the number of generator sets whose paralleling

breakers have closed.
Total Online Capacity
Indicates the sum of the ratings of the generator sets

whose paralleling breakers
are closed.
The capacity in Total Online Capacity plus the sum of the

ratings of the generator sets that have started or restarted
but not come online yet. This is used by load demand to
avoid restarting another generator set until a previouslyrestarted generator set either closes its paralleling
breaker or fails to come online.
16
A029Y787 (Issue 1)
Components
4.1
MCM3320 Base Board

This circuit board contains the microprocessor and the operational software.
FIGURE 5.
4.1.1
MCM3320 BASE BOARD
Hardware Version
Hardware Version indicates the revision of the MCM3320 base board.
TABLE 6.
HARDWARE VERSION
Hardware Version
Hardware Revision
unknown
A or B
A029Y787 (Issue 1)
17
4. Components
4.1.2
5-2012
Hardware Version
Hardware Revision
SYNC1320
255
hardware error
Summary of Connections
TABLE 7.
Connection
Description
CT1-CT6
4.1.3
SUMMARY OF CONNECTIONS
Current sensing
J14
Modbus
TB1
PCCNet, switch inputs
TB2
Power, switch inputs, configurable outputs
TB3
Load demand, inhibits, configurable outputs
TB6
Generator set bus voltage sensing
TB7
Utility voltage sensing
TB8
Breaker control, generator set remote start
TB9
Analog inputs, analog outputs
TB10
Breaker status
TB15
Modbus, InPower
CT1-CT6 Connections
FIGURE 6.
CT1-CT6
This connector is oriented the same way it is oriented in Figure 5.

TABLE 8.
CT1-CT6 ASSIGNMENTS: CURRENT SENSING
Pin
Description
Function / Connects to
CT1
Generator Set Bus Current L1
Generator set bus L1
CT2
CT3
CT4
Utility Current L1
Utility L1
CT5
Utility Current L2
Utility L2
CT6
Utility Current L3
Utility L3
Route the external current transformer (CT) secondary wiring through the CT such that current
flows through the onboard CT entering at 1 when the measured source is providing power.
18
A029Y787 (Issue 1)
5-2012
4. Components
4.1.3.1 Calibrating Voltage and Current Measurements

Calibration affects the voltage and current values used in all of its calculations, for example,
power and energy, load control, and synchronization. Calibration also affects the values
provided over network connections, such as PCCNet, Modbus, or InPower.
NOTE:
Use a true, calibrated RMS meter to check the actual output.
Typically, the InPower setup screens are used in the calibration process.
Calibrate voltage and current separately for the generator set bus and for the utility. For each
source, these values can be calibrated.
Current in each phase
Line-to-line voltage between each pair of phases (Line-to-neutral voltage is calculated
based on the calibrated line-to-line voltage.)
It is not possible to calibrate the frequency measurement.
4.1.4
J14 Connections
FIGURE 7.
J14 PINS

This DB9 connector for RS-232 communication can be used by Modbus devices. Use a null
modem cable with partial handshaking.
NOTE:
You have to disconnect J14 before you can connect a PC-based service tool
on TB15.
4.1.4.1 DB9 Connections

The standard DB9 connections are shown below:
A029Y787 (Issue 1)
19
4. Components
5-2012
FIGURE 8.
4.1.5
DB9 CONNECTIONS
TB1 Connections
FIGURE 9.
TB1 PINS

TABLE 9.
Pin
20
TB1 PIN ASSIGNMENTS: PCCNET, SWITCH INPUTS
Description
TB1-1
Fused B+
Power supply for HMI 211
TB1-2
PCCNet A
Network Data A
TB1-3
PCCNet B
Network Data B
TB1-4
PCCNet Shield
PCCNet harness shield
TB1-5
N/A
TB1-6
N/A
TB1-7
N/A
TB1-8
N/A
TB1-9
N/A
TB1-10
Discrete Input Return
Signal return for switch inputs
A029Y787 (Issue 1)
5-2012
Pin
4. Components
Description
TB1-11
Synchronizer Enable
Enables synchronizing when the control is in

Manual mode or in Master Synchronize Only
mode
TB1-12
N/A
TB1-13
TB1-14
Override
Forces a transfer or retransfer to occur as quickly

as possible; overrides transfer inhibit, retransfer
inhibit, transfer time delay and retransfer time
delay
TB1-15
TB1-16
Utility Source Failure
Indicates that the utility has failed; used in

applications in which an external device
determines utility source availability
4.1.5.1 Discrete Inputs

Discrete inputs are inputs that are either active or inactive.
The states may be mapped to different names, such as stop/start or breaker open/breaker
closed.
4.1.5.2 Volatiles for Discrete Inputs

Many discrete inputs have volatiles associated with them. The volatile is a software source for
the discrete input. If the volatile is set to its active value, the discrete input becomes active. If
the volatile is set its to inactive value, the discrete input becomes inactive if none of the other
sources, such as hardware sources, are active.
Volatiles may be available over network connections, such as PCCNet, Modbus, or InPower.
4.1.6
TB2 Connections
FIGURE 10.
TB2 PINS
A029Y787 (Issue 1)
21
4. Components
5-2012
TABLE 10.
Pin
TB2 PIN ASSIGNMENTS: POWER, SWITCH INPUTS, CONFIGURABLE OUTPUTS

Description
TB2-1
Test Start
Starts and stops a test of the system
TB2-2
Battery
Battery 1 or battery 2 return
TB2-3
Battery
TB2-4
Extended Parallel Start
Signal to start extended parallel
TB2-5
Battery
TB2-6
TB2-7
Battery
TB2-8
Battery 1 +
Battery 1 power (+)
TB2-9
Battery 1 +
Battery 1 power (+)
TB2-10
Relay Coil B+ Supply
Switched B+
TB2-11
Battery 2 +
Battery 2 power (+)
TB2-12
Battery 2 +
Battery 2 power (+)
TB2-13
N/A
TB2-14
Fault Reset
Resets faults; if active for 5 seconds, displays

fault codes on the seven-segment display
TB2-15
Configurable Output #1
Defaults to Common Warning; intended to drive a

relay coil
TB2-16
Defaults to Fail to Sync; intended to drive a relay

coil
TB2-17
Defaults to Gen Available; intended to drive a

relay coil
TB2-18
Defaults to Utility Available; intended to drive a

relay coil
TB2-19
Chassis Ground
Connected by short wire to grounded metal

chassis.
Only one battery is required; use the second battery for redundancy.
TB2-15, TB2-16, TB2-17, and TB2-18 are low-side drivers.
TABLE 11.
LOW-SIDE DRIVER SPECIFICATIONS
Description
Value
Maximum voltage
30 VDC
Maximum current
250 mA
Maximum inrush
3A
Leakage current (off-state)
100 uA
4.1.6.1 Configurable Outputs

Configurable outputs are discrete outputs whose state depends on a specified event code or
fault code. If the specified event or fault is active, the configurable output is active. If the
specified event or fault is inactive, the configurable output is inactive.
22
A029Y787 (Issue 1)
5-2012
4.1.7
4. Components
TB3 Connections
FIGURE 11.
TB3 PINS

TABLE 12.
Pin
TB3 PIN ASSIGNMENTS: LOAD DEMAND, INHIBITS, CONFIGURABLE OUTPUTS

Description
TB3-1
Load Govern Enable
Connects to utility circuit breaker position on

generator set controls; tells generator set controls
when generator sets are in parallel with the utility
TB3-2
Load Demand Generator Set 1
Connects to load demand input on generator set

1
TB3-3
N/A
TB3-4
N/A
TB3-5
N/A
TB3-6
Transfer Inhibit
Inhibits transfer of loads to generator sets; in

some situations, it is ignored; it is not the same
as the generator set paralleling breaker inhibit
TB3-7
Retransfer Inhibit
Inhibits transfer of loads to utility; in some

situations, it is ignored; it is not the same as the
utility breaker inhibit
TB3-8
TB3-9

2
TB3-10

3
TB3-11

4
TB3-12
Defaults to Fail to Disconnect; intended to drive a

relay coil
TB3-13
Defaults to Synchronized; intended to drive a

relay coil
TB3-14
Defaults to Sync Output Limit; intended to drive a

relay coil
TB3-15
Defaults to Hardware Failure; intended to drive a

relay coil
TB3-16
Generator Set Paralleling Breaker Inhibit
Connects to generator set paralleling breaker

inhibit input on generator set controls
TB3-17
Master Inhibit
Used when there are multiple MCM3320s in a

system; master inhibit for breaker control and
synchronizer; ground/return this signal to activate
inhibit
A029Y787 (Issue 1)
23
4. Components
5-2012
TABLE 13.
Description
Value
Maximum voltage
30 VDC
Maximum current
250 mA
Maximum inrush
3A
100 uA
4.1.7.1 Discrete Outputs

Discrete outputs are outputs that are either active or inactive.
The states may be mapped to different names, such as driver off/driver on or open
breaker/close breaker.
4.1.8
TB6 Connections
FIGURE 12.
TB6 PINS

TABLE 14.
Pin
TB6 PIN ASSIGNMENTS: GENERATOR SET BUS VOLTAGE
Description
TB6-1
Generator Set Bus L1 Voltage
up to 480 VAC (line-to-line)
TB6-2
TB6-3
TB6-4
Generator Set Bus Neutral Voltage
If the nominal voltage of the generator set bus is greater than 480 VAC (line-to-line), potential
transformers (PTs) are required to reduce the voltage to less than 480 VAC (line-to-line) before
it enters the control.

NOTE:
24
A029Y787 (Issue 1)
5-2012
4. Components
4.1.9
TB7 Connections
FIGURE 13.
TB7 PINS

TABLE 15.
Pin
TB7 PIN ASSIGNMENTS: UTILITY VOLTAGE
Description
TB7-1
Utility L1 Voltage
TB7-2
Utility L2 Voltage
TB7-3
Utility L3 Voltage
TB7-4
Utility Neutral Voltage
If the utility voltage is greater than 480 VAC (line-to-line), potential transformers (PTs) are
required to reduce the voltage to less than 480 VAC (line-to-line) before it enters the control.
4.1.10 TB8 Connections
FIGURE 14.
TB8 PINS

TABLE 16.
Pin
TB8 PIN ASSIGNMENTS: BREAKER CONTROL, GENERATOR SET REMOTE START

Description
TB8-1
N/A
TB8-2
Generator Set Main Breaker Close 1
Closes the generator set main breaker; normallyopen contacts
TB8-3
Generator Set Main Breaker Close 2
Closes the generator set main breaker; normallyopen contacts
TB8-4
N/A
TB8-5
Generator Set Main Breaker Open 1
A029Y787 (Issue 1)
Opens the generator set main breaker; normallyopen contacts
25
4. Components
Pin
5-2012
Description
TB8-6
Generator Set Main Breaker Open 2
Opens the generator set main breaker; normallyopen contacts
TB8-7
Generator Set Start Relay Normally-closed
Starts the generator sets
TB8-8
Generator Set Start Relay Common
Starts the generator sets
TB8-9
Generator Set Start Relay Normally-open
Starts the generator sets; connect in parallel to

generator set remote start signals
TB8-10
Utility Main Breaker Close 1
Closes the utility main breaker; normally-open

contacts
TB8-11
Utility Main Breaker Close 2
Closes the utility main breaker; normally-open

contacts
TB8-12
Utility Main Breaker Open 1
Opens the utility main breaker; normally-open

contacts
TB8-13
Utility Main Breaker Open 2
Opens the utility main breaker; normally-open

contacts
TABLE 17.
BREAKER CLOSE SPECIFICATIONS
Description
Value
Maximum voltage
30 VDC or 250 VAC
Maximum current
8 A (resistive)
3.5 A (inductive)
Time constant (L/R)
7 ms
TABLE 18.
BREAKER OPEN SPECIFICATIONS
Description
Value
Maximum voltage
30 VDC
Maximum current
8 A (resistive)
3.5 A (inductive)
Time constant (L/R)
7 ms
FIGURE 15.
TB9 PINS
26
A029Y787 (Issue 1)
5-2012
4. Components
TABLE 19.
Pin
TB9 PIN ASSIGNMENTS: ANALOG INPUTS/OUTPUTS
Description
TB9-1
kW Load Setpoint
Sets the kW setpoint for base load or peak

shave; 0-5 VDC analog input; 1 VDC
corresponds to 0% load, 4.5 VDC corresponds to
110% load
TB9-2
Analog Return
Signal return for analog inputs
TB9-3
kVAR Load Setpoint
Sets the kVAR setpoint or power factor setpoint

for base load or peak shave; 0-5 VDC analog
input
If this is the kVAR setpoint, 1 VDC corresponds
to 0% load, 4.5 VDC corresponds to 110% load.
If this is the power factor setpoint, this
corresponds to what the kVAR setpoint would
have been. For example, if the kVAR load
setpoint would have been 80%, the power factor
setpoint is 0.80. The power factor setpoint is
limited to 0.7-1.0. If the input signal is outside this
range, the power factor setpoint is set to 0.7 or
1.0 accordingly.
TB9-4
kW Master Load Control
Connected in parallel to generator set kW load

setpoints; sets the generator set kW load govern
level; use shielded twisted pair cable; 0-5 VDC
analog output; 1 VDC corresponds to 0% load,
4.5 VDC corresponds to 110% load
TB9-5
kVAR Master Load Control
Connected in parallel to generator set kVAR load

setpoints; sets the generator set kW load govern
level; use shielded twisted pair cable; 0-5 VDC
analog output; 1 VDC corresponds to 0% load,
4.5 VDC corresponds to 110% load
TB9-6
Analog Return
TB9-7
N/A
TB9-8
Master Frequency Bias +
Connected to generator set kW load share line;

synchronizes the generator sets with the utility; 2.5~5 VDC analog input/output
TB9-9
Analog Return
TB9-10
Master Voltage Bias +
Connected to generator set kVAR load share line;

TB9-11
N/A
4.1.11.1 Analog Inputs

Analog inputs are inputs that can have a range of values.
While analog inputs are based on an input voltage, the value may have a different meaning,
such as current or percentage of nominal voltage.
4.1.11.1.1 Process Values of Analog Inputs

The process value of an analog input is the value of the analog input that is used in any
calculations or operations. It is not the value of the analog input that is displayed.
A029Y787 (Issue 1)
27
4. Components
5-2012
4.1.11.1.2 Display Values of Analog Inputs

The display values of an analog input are the values of the analog input that are displayed.
They are not the values of the analog input that are used in any calculations or operations.
Typically, display values are updated less frequently than the value used in calculations and
operations.
An analog input can have different types of display values.
Voltage display value: this is the current value of the input for technicians, for example, in
InPower.
Engineering units display value: this is the current value of the input for operators, for
example, in the operator panel.
Raw sample value: this value is the output of the sampling process that converts the
analog signal into a digital signal. It is not affected by the override enable and override
commands as the other types are.
4.1.11.2 Analog Outputs

Analog outputs are outputs that can have a range of values.
While analog outputs are based on an output voltage, the value may have a different meaning
to the device to which it is connected.
4.1.11.2.1 Output Predictor Values

Analog outputs have an output predictor value associated with them. The output predictor value
is the voltage level that the associated analog output is supposed to have.
This value can be used for testing.
FIGURE 16.
TB10 PINS

TABLE 20.
Pin
28
TB10 PIN ASSIGNMENTS: BREAKER STATUS
Description
TB10-1
Generator Set Main Breaker Position A
Input for the position of the "A" contact for the

generator set main breaker
TB10-2
Generator Set Main Breaker Position B
Input for the position of the "B" contact for the

generator set main breaker
TB10-3
Generator Set Main Breaker Tripped
Input that indicates whether or not the generator

set main breaker is tripped
TB10-4
A029Y787 (Issue 1)
5-2012
Pin
4. Components
Description
TB10-5
Generator Set Breaker Inhibit
Customer input; opens the generator set main

breaker or inhibits the paralleling breakers
depending on the topology
TB10-6
Auto/Manual
Sets the mode of operation of the MCM3320
TB10-7
Utility Main Breaker Position A

utility main breaker
TB10-8
TB10-9
Utility Main Breaker Position B
Input for the position of the "B" contact for the

utility main breaker
TB10-10
Utility Main Breaker Tripped
Input that indicates whether or not the utility main

breaker is tripped
TB10-11
Utility Main Breaker Inhibit
Customer input; opens the utility main breaker
TB10-12
Generator Set 1 Paralleling Breaker Position A

generator set 1 paralleling breaker
TB10-13
TB10-14

TB10-15

TB10-16

TB10-17
TB10-18
FIGURE 17.
TB15 PINS

TABLE 21.
Pin
TB15 PIN ASSIGNMENTS: MODBUS, SERVICE TOOL
Description
TB15-1
RS-485 Shield
Network shield
TB15-2
Fused B+ (0.25 A)
Connected to external, low-power devices, such

as a RS-232-to-RS-485 converter or a simple
display
TB15-3
RS-485 Data A
Network data A
TB15-4
RS-485 Data B
Network data B
TB15-5
N/A
A029Y787 (Issue 1)
29
4. Components
5-2012
4.1.13.1 Dual-Purpose RS-485 Connection

NOTE:
You have to disconnect J14 before you can connect a PC-based service tool
on TB15.
This RS-485 connection can be used by Modbus or PC-based service tools (MON).
NOTE:
Use J14 if you want to connect to the control with a PC-based service tool
without disconnecting any Modbus devices on TB15.
If the control is using Modbus on the RS-485 connection, the control changes to MON if the
following steps occur.
1. The control receives 5 consecutive bad Modbus packets, or the receiver buffer is full.
2. The control does not receive any valid Modbus packets for 5 seconds.
If the control is using MON on the RS-485 connection, the control changes to Modbus if the
following steps occur.
1. The control receives 5 consecutive bad MON packets.
2. The control does not receive any valid MON packets for 5 seconds.
4.1.13.2 Modbus Connections

NOTE:
See http://www.modbus.org for more information about Modbus and up-todate wire specifications.
The control should be connected to external devices via Modbus RTU (Remote Terminal Unit)
protocol on a two-wire RS-485 master/slave bus. In this arrangement, the external device is the
master, and the control is the slave.
A Modbus over Serial Line Cable must be shielded. One end of the shield must be connected to
protective ground.
A four-wire RS-485 connection can be converted to a two-wire RS-485 connection by shorting
the RX/TX pairs of wires together.
FIGURE 18.
CONVERTING FOUR-WIRE RS-485 CONNECTIONS TO TWO-WIRE RS-485

CONNECTIONS
If you convert a four-wire RS-485 connection to a two-wire RS-485 connection, make sure the
start bit, stop bit, speed, and flow control are synchronized. See http://www.modbus.org for
more information.
4.1.13.3 InPower
InPowerTM is a Windows-based service, maintenance and diagnostic tool. This tool provides
electronic service functions including: adjustments for trims and settings, monitoring, strip chart,
data logging, viewing faults, and report capability.
NOTE:
30
PowerCommand is a registered trademark of Cummins Inc.
A029Y787 (Issue 1)
5-2012
4. Components
The InPower tool also can be used to save a device's trims and settings to a file. The stored
settings can be viewed off-line and they can be used to configure multiple installations of the
same application controller type.
Each copy of InPower is packaged and installed separately. No more than one InPower product
can be installed on the same PC.
4.1.13.4 Connecting an MCM3320

The MCM3320 master control requires an RS-232 to RS-485 data converter and a unique
cable. Figure 19 shows the MCM3320 InPower connection.
Kit number 541-1199 is available for use with the MCM3320. The kit includes the RS-232 to RS485 converter and the cable used for this application.
If the service PC does not have a serial port, a USB-to-serial converter may be required as well.
FIGURE 19.
INPOWER SERIAL CONNECTION WITH MCM3320 CONTROL
4.1.13.5 Configuring the MCM3320

There are two ways to configure the MCM3320 in InPower.
Use the folders in the device explorer, the same way you configure any device.
A029Y787 (Issue 1)
31
4. Components
5-2012
Use the MCM3320 setup screens. Right-click on the device to open these screens.
4.1.14 Power-down Mode

The control does not support power-down mode, or sleep mode. It remains awake at all times.
4.1.15 System and Diagnostic Indicators
FIGURE 20.
SYSTEM AND DIAGNOSTIC INDICATORS
TABLE 22.
Indicator
Name
Description
DS1
Utility Available
The utility is available.
DS2
Utility Connected
The utility is connected to the loads.
DS3
Heartbeat
This flashes regularly when the board is running

normally.
DS4
Generator Set Connected
The generator sets are connected to the loads.
DS5
Generator Set Available
The generator sets are available.
DS6
Common Alarm
At least one fault is active.
DS7
Not In Auto
The control is in Manual mode.

(Blinking green) The system is trying to
synchronize the generator sets with the utility.
Sync Check Close Allowed is Not Allowed.
Code 1457 (Fail to Synchronize Warning) is
inactive.
DS8
Synchronizer
(Green) The system is ready to connect one of

the sources to the loads. Sync Check Close
Allowed is Allowed. Code 1457 (Fail to
Synchronize Warning) is inactive.
(Red) Code 1457 (Fail to Synchronize Warning)
is active.
32
A029Y787 (Issue 1)
5-2012
4. Components
Indicator
Name
DS9
Description
The control is receiving a Modbus packet or is
sending a Modbus packet.
In addition, this indicator is on during the 5second wait before changing communication
protocols on TB15.
Modbus Activity
U51 displays different information depending on the mode. The mode is indicated by the
decimal point in the lower right corner. To put U51 in System mode, press the fault reset switch
(TB2-14) for less than five seconds. To put U51 in Diagnostic mode, press the fault reset switch
(TB2-14) for at least five seconds.
TABLE 23.
U51 INFORMATION
Mode
Decimal Point
Display
System
off
Codes for System State (Table 38)
Diagnostic
on
Codes of active faults
Some codes for System State are not available in every topology.
TABLE 24.
U51 CODES FOR SYSTEM STATE
Code
Description
Time delay start
Time delay stop
Time Delay Programmed Transition (TDPT)
Time Delay Normal to Emergency (TDNE)
Time Delay Emergency to Normal (TDEN)
Synchronizing (The synchronizer is running, and Sync Check

Close Allowed is Not Allowed.)
Synchronizer check OK (Sync Check Close Allowed is Allowed.)
Inhibit
Ramp unload
Ramp load
Manual mode
Utility failure
Test
Extended parallel
Standby (PTC Operating Mode is Normal, and the other activity

codes are not applicable.)
Not available
4.1.16 Repairing Circuit Boards

WARNING: Attempting to repair circuit boards can lead to equipment damage, personal
injury, or death. Replace faulty circuit boards. Do not try to repair faulty
circuit boards.
A029Y787 (Issue 1)
33
4. Components
4.2
5-2012
SYNC1320 Base Board

This circuit board contains the microprocessor and the operational software.
FIGURE 21.
4.2.1
Summary of Connections
TABLE 25.
Connection
34
SYNC1320 BASE BOARD
SUMMARY OF CONNECTIONS
Description
TB1
Synchronizer enable switch
TB2
Power, fault reset, configurable outputs
TB3
Configurable outputs
TB6
Generator set bus voltage sensing
TB7
Utility voltage sensing
TB9
Analog inputs, analog outputs
TB10
Auto/manual switch
TB15
InPower
A029Y787 (Issue 1)
5-2012
4.2.2
4. Components
TB1 Connections
FIGURE 22.
TB1 PINS

TABLE 26.
Pin
TB1 PIN ASSIGNMENTS: SYNCHRONIZER ENABLE SWITCH
Description
TB1-1
N/A
TB1-2
N/A
TB1-3
N/A
TB1-4
N/A
TB1-5
N/A
TB1-6
N/A
TB1-7
N/A
TB1-8
N/A
TB1-9
N/A
TB1-10
TB1-11
Synchronizer Enable
Enables synchronizing when the control is in

Manual mode or in Master Synchronize Only
mode
TB1-12
N/A
TB1-13
N/A
TB1-14
N/A
TB1-15
N/A
TB1-16
N/A
4.2.2.1 Discrete Inputs

Discrete inputs are inputs that are either active or inactive.
The states may be mapped to different names, such as stop/start or breaker open/breaker
closed.
4.2.2.2 Volatiles for Discrete Inputs

Many discrete inputs have volatiles associated with them. The volatile is a software source for
the discrete input. If the volatile is set to its active value, the discrete input becomes active. If
the volatile is set its to inactive value, the discrete input becomes inactive if none of the other
sources, such as hardware sources, are active.
Volatiles may be available over network connections, such as PCCNet, Modbus, or InPower.
A029Y787 (Issue 1)
35
4. Components
4.2.3
5-2012
TB2 Connections
FIGURE 23.
TB2 PINS

TABLE 27.
Pin
36
TB2 PIN ASSIGNMENTS: POWER, FAULT RESET, CONFIGURABLE OUTPUTS
Description
TB2-1
N/A
TB2-2
Battery
TB2-3
Battery
TB2-4
N/A
TB2-5
Battery
TB2-6
TB2-7
Battery
TB2-8
Battery 1 +
Battery 1 power (+)
TB2-9
Battery 1 +
Battery 1 power (+)
TB2-10
Relay Coil B+ Supply
Switched B+
TB2-11
Battery 2 +
Battery 2 power (+)
TB2-12
Battery 2 +
Battery 2 power (+)
TB2-13
N/A
TB2-14
Fault Reset
Resets faults; if active for 5 seconds, displays

fault codes on the seven-segment display
TB2-15
Defaults to Common Warning; intended to drive a

relay coil
TB2-16
Defaults to Fail to Sync; intended to drive a relay

coil
TB2-17
Defaults to Gen Available; intended to drive a

relay coil
TB2-18
Defaults to Utility Available; intended to drive a

relay coil
A029Y787 (Issue 1)
5-2012
4. Components
Pin
Description
TB2-19
Chassis Ground
Only one battery is required; use the second battery for redundancy.
TABLE 28.
Description
Value
Maximum voltage
30 VDC
Maximum current
250 mA
Maximum inrush
3A
100 uA
4.2.3.1 Configurable Outputs

Configurable outputs are discrete outputs whose state depends on a specified event code or
fault code. If the specified event or fault is active, the configurable output is active. If the
specified event or fault is inactive, the configurable output is inactive.
4.2.4
TB3 Connections
FIGURE 24.
TB3 PINS

TABLE 29.
Pin
TB3 PIN ASSIGNMENTS: CONFIGURABLE OUTPUTS
Description
TB3-1
N/A
TB3-2
N/A
TB3-3
N/A
TB3-4
N/A
TB3-5
N/A
TB3-6
N/A
TB3-7
N/A
TB3-8
N/A
TB3-9
N/A
TB3-10
N/A
TB3-11
N/A
TB3-12
A029Y787 (Issue 1)
Defaults to Fail to Disconnect; intended to drive a

relay coil
37
4. Components
5-2012
Pin
Description
TB3-13
Defaults to Synchronized; intended to drive a

relay coil
TB3-14
Defaults to Sync Output Limit; intended to drive a

relay coil
TB3-15
Defaults to Hardware Failure; intended to drive a

relay coil
TB3-16
N/A
TB3-17
N/A

TABLE 30.
Description
Value
Maximum voltage
30 VDC
Maximum current
250 mA
Maximum inrush
3A
4.2.5
100 uA
TB6 Connections
FIGURE 25.
TB6 PINS

TABLE 31.
Pin
TB6 PIN ASSIGNMENTS: GENERATOR SET BUS VOLTAGE
Description
TB6-1
TB6-2
TB6-3
TB6-4
Generator Set Bus Neutral Voltage
If the nominal voltage of the generator set bus is greater than 480 VAC (line-to-line), potential
transformers (PTs) are required to reduce the voltage to less than 480 VAC (line-to-line) before
it enters the control.
38
A029Y787 (Issue 1)
5-2012
4. Components

NOTE:
4.2.6
TB7 Connections
FIGURE 26.
TB7 PINS

TABLE 32.
Pin
TB7 PIN ASSIGNMENTS: UTILITY VOLTAGE
Description
TB7-1
Utility L1 Voltage
TB7-2
Utility L2 Voltage
TB7-3
Utility L3 Voltage
TB7-4
Utility Neutral Voltage
If the utility voltage is greater than 480 VAC (line-to-line), potential transformers (PTs) are
required to reduce the voltage to less than 480 VAC (line-to-line) before it enters the control.
4.2.7
TB9 Connections
FIGURE 27.
TB9 PINS

A029Y787 (Issue 1)
39
4. Components
5-2012
TABLE 33.
Pin
TB9 PIN ASSIGNMENTS: ANALOG INPUTS/OUTPUTS
Description
TB9-1
N/A
TB9-2
N/A
TB9-3
N/A
TB9-4
N/A
TB9-5
N/A
TB9-6
N/A
TB9-7
N/A
TB9-8
Master Frequency Bias +
Connected to generator set kW load share line;

TB9-9
Analog Return
TB9-10
Master Voltage Bias +
Connected to generator set kVAR load share line;

TB9-11
N/A
4.2.7.1 Analog Inputs

Analog inputs are inputs that can have a range of values.
While analog inputs are based on an input voltage, the value may have a different meaning,
such as current or percentage of nominal voltage.
4.2.7.1.1 Process Values of Analog Inputs

The process value of an analog input is the value of the analog input that is used in any
calculations or operations. It is not the value of the analog input that is displayed.
4.2.7.1.2 Display Values of Analog Inputs

The display values of an analog input are the values of the analog input that are displayed.
They are not the values of the analog input that are used in any calculations or operations.
Typically, display values are updated less frequently than the value used in calculations and
operations.
An analog input can have different types of display values.
Voltage display value: this is the current value of the input for technicians, for example, in
InPower.
Engineering units display value: this is the current value of the input for operators, for
example, in the operator panel.
Raw sample value: this value is the output of the sampling process that converts the
analog signal into a digital signal. It is not affected by the override enable and override
commands as the other types are.
4.2.7.2 Analog Outputs

Analog outputs are outputs that can have a range of values.
40
A029Y787 (Issue 1)
5-2012
4. Components
While analog outputs are based on an output voltage, the value may have a different meaning
to the device to which it is connected.
4.2.7.2.1 Output Signals for Analog Outputs

The output signal of an analog output is a pulse-width modulated (PWM) signal. The PWM
signal has a frequency of 4 kHz. If this signal is sampled more quickly than this, it is possible to
measure the incorrect voltage.
4.2.7.2.2 Output Predictor Values

Analog outputs have an output predictor value associated with them. The output predictor value
is the voltage level that the associated analog output is supposed to have.
This value can be used for testing.
4.2.8
TB10 Connections
FIGURE 28.
TB10 PINS

TABLE 34.
Pin
TB10 PIN ASSIGNMENTS: AUTO/MANUAL SWITCH
Description
TB10-1
N/A
TB10-2
N/A
TB10-3
N/A
TB10-4
N/A
TB10-5
N/A
TB10-6
Auto/Manual
TB10-7
N/A
TB10-8
TB10-9
N/A
TB10-10
N/A
TB10-11
N/A
TB10-12
N/A
TB10-13
N/A
TB10-14
N/A
TB10-15
N/A
TB10-16
N/A
TB10-17
TB10-18
N/A
A029Y787 (Issue 1)
Sets the mode of operation of the MCM3320
41
4. Components
4.2.9
5-2012
TB15 Connections
FIGURE 29.
TB15 PINS

TABLE 35.
Pin
TB15 PIN ASSIGNMENTS: MODBUS, SERVICE TOOL
Description
TB15-1
RS-485 Shield
Network shield
TB15-2
Fused B+ (0.25 A)
Connected to external, low-power devices, such

as a RS-232-to-RS-485 converter or a simple
display
TB15-3
RS-485 Data A
Network data A
TB15-4
RS-485 Data B
Network data B
TB15-5
N/A
4.2.9.1 InPower
InPowerTM is a Windows-based service, maintenance and diagnostic tool. This tool provides
electronic service functions including: adjustments for trims and settings, monitoring, strip chart,
data logging, viewing faults, and report capability.
NOTE:
PowerCommand is a registered trademark of Cummins Inc.
The InPower tool also can be used to save a device's trims and settings to a file. The stored
settings can be viewed off-line and they can be used to configure multiple installations of the
same application controller type.
Each copy of InPower is packaged and installed separately. No more than one InPower product
can be installed on the same PC.
4.2.9.2 Connecting a SYNC1320

Connect to the SYNC1320 the same way you connect to a MCM3320 on TB15.
4.2.9.3 Configuring the SYNC1320

There are two ways to configure the SYNC1320 in InPower.
Use the folders in the device explorer, the same way you configure any device.
Use the SYNC1320 setup screens. Right-click on the device to open these screens.
4.2.10 Power-down Mode

The control does not support power-down mode, or sleep mode. It remains awake at all times.
42
A029Y787 (Issue 1)
5-2012
4. Components
4.2.11 System and Diagnostic Indicators
FIGURE 30.
TABLE 36.
Indicator
Name
Description
DS1
Utility Available
DS2
Utility Connected
DS3
Heartbeat
This flashes regularly when the board is running

normally.
DS4
Generator Set Connected
DS5
Generator Set Available
DS6
Common Alarm
DS7
Not In Auto
The control is in Manual mode.

(Blinking green) The system is trying to
synchronize the generator sets with the utility.
Sync Check Close Allowed is Not Allowed.
Code 1457 (Fail to Synchronize Warning) is
inactive.
DS8
Synchronizer
(Green) The system is ready to connect one of

the sources to the loads. Sync Check Close
Allowed is Allowed. Code 1457 (Fail to
Synchronize Warning) is inactive.
(Red) Code 1457 (Fail to Synchronize Warning)
is active.
DS9
A029Y787 (Issue 1)
Modbus Activity
The control is receiving a Modbus packet or is

sending a Modbus packet.
In addition, this indicator is on during the 5second wait before changing communication
protocols on TB15.
43
4. Components
5-2012
U51 displays different information depending on the mode. The mode is indicated by the
decimal point in the lower right corner. To put U51 in System mode, press the fault reset switch
(TB2-14) for less than five seconds. To put U51 in Diagnostic mode, press the fault reset switch
(TB2-14) for at least five seconds.
TABLE 37.
U51 INFORMATION
Mode
Decimal Point
Display
System
off
Codes for System State (Table 38)
Diagnostic
on
Codes of active faults
Some codes for System State are not available in every topology.
TABLE 38.
U51 CODES FOR SYSTEM STATE
Code
Description
Time delay start
Time delay stop
Time Delay Programmed Transition (TDPT)
Time Delay Normal to Emergency (TDNE)
Time Delay Emergency to Normal (TDEN)
Synchronizing (The synchronizer is running, and Sync Check

Close Allowed is Not Allowed.)
Synchronizer check OK (Sync Check Close Allowed is Allowed.)
Inhibit
Ramp unload
Ramp load
Manual mode
Utility failure
Test
Extended parallel
Standby (PTC Operating Mode is Normal, and the other activity

codes are not applicable.)
Not available

circuit boards.
44
A029Y787 (Issue 1)
5-2012
4. Components
4.3
Operator Panel
4.3.1
Back Panel
FIGURE 31.
BACK PANEL
4.3.1.1 J1/J2 Connections

J1 and J2 are identical. Either connector can be used to connect to the MCM3320. The other
connector can be used to connect additional devices to the PCCNet network.
TABLE 39.
Pin
J1/J2 PIN ASSIGNMENTS
Description
RS-485 Data A
RS-485 Data B
Fused B+ (0.25 A), connected to external, low-power devices, such as a RS-232to-RS-485 converter or a simple display
Not used
Fused B+ return
Not used
Not used
A029Y787 (Issue 1)
45
4. Components
5-2012
Pin
Description
4.3.2
Not used
Front Panel
FIGURE 32.
FRONT PANEL
4.3.2.1 Summary of Indicators

TABLE 40.
Indicator
SUMMARY OF INDICATORS
Description
Utility Parallel
PTC State is Paralleled.
Lockout
System Lockout Status is Active.
Warning
Code 1483 (Common Alarm) is active.
Remote Start
The generator set start relay (TB8-7, TB-8, TB8-9) is

active.
Auto
Auto/Manual Sw is Auto.
Manual
Auto/Manual Sw is Manual.
4.3.2.2 Summary of Buttons

TABLE 41.
Button
Soft-key buttons (4)
46
SUMMARY OF BUTTONS
Description
The functions of these buttons vary depending on the
screen. Some buttons may not have any function in a
particular screen.
Press this to return to the previous screen.
Press this to return to the main screen.
A029Y787 (Issue 1)
5-2012
4.3.3
4. Components
Compatible Software Versions (Operator Panel)

TABLE 42.
4.3.4
COMPATIBLE SOFTWARE VERSIONS (OPERATOR PANEL)
MCM3320
Operator Panel
V2.01 or later
V1.20 or later
Main Screen
The main screen provides the status of the system. It depends on the topology.
4.3.4.1 Main Screen (Master Synchronize Only or Component Mode)
FIGURE 33.
EXAMPLE: MAIN SCREEN (MASTER SYNCHRONIZE ONLY OR COMPONENT MODE)
The top of the screen is System State.

The middle of the screen indicates whether or not the utility is available, the synchronizer is
running, and the generator sets are available.
The soft-key buttons provide access to other screens or generate a fault reset.
4.3.4.2 Main Screen (Isolated Bus Without Generator Set Main Breaker or
Isolated Bus with Generator Set Main Breaker)
FIGURE 34. EXAMPLE: MAIN SCREEN (ISOLATED BUS WITHOUT GENERATOR SET MAIN
BREAKER OR ISOLATED BUS WITH GENERATOR SET MAIN BREAKER)
The top of the screen is System State.
The middle of the screen indicates whether or not the generator sets are available and whether
or not the generator sets are connected to the loads. If the generator sets are available and
connected to the loads, the screen also displays the average line-to-line voltage and real power
provided by the generator sets.
A029Y787 (Issue 1)
47
4. Components
5-2012
4.3.4.3 Main Screen (Common Bus or Transfer Pair)
FIGURE 35.
EXAMPLE: MAIN SCREEN (COMMON BUS OR TRANSFER PAIR)
The top of the screen is System State. If System State indicates that a timer is running, the
screen also displays the remaining time.
The middle of the screen indicates whether or not the generator sets are available, the utility is
available, the generator sets are connected are connected to the loads, and the utility is
connected to the loads. In addition, the screen displays additional information depending on the
status of the system.
If PTC State is Paralleled, the screen displays the average line-to-line voltage of the utility,
the frequency of the generator sets, and the real power provided by each source.
If PTC State is Not Connected and no timer is running at the top of the screen, the screen
displays the average line-to-line voltage and frequency of each source, as well as the
phase difference between the sources.
If the synchronizer is running and no timer is running at the top of the screen, the screen
displays the average line-to-line voltage and frequency of each source, as well as the
phase difference between the sources.
Otherwise, the screen displays the average line-to-line voltage, real power, frequency, and
power factor of the source that is connected to the loads.
4.3.4.4 Fault Announcement

When a fault becomes active, the operator panel announces the fault. The fault is displayed
until the screen is changed by pressing one of the appropriate buttons.
The fault is announced only once regardless of how long it remains active. When the screen
changes, the fault is not displayed anymore, but the fault remains active. The Fault screens can
be used to look at the fault and to reset the fault after the fault is announced.
If more than one fault is active, each fault is announced separately, starting with the mostrecently generated fault.
4.3.4.5 Control Screens

These screens are intended to be used to operate the system after initial setup. For example, it
is possible to start tests or run the system in extended parallel.
4.3.4.6 Adjust Screens

These screens provide most of the settings that are available in the operator panel. They are
intended to be used for initial setup, troubleshooting, and features like the scheduler that are
typically setup once.
48
A029Y787 (Issue 1)
5-2012
4. Components
4.3.4.7 Monitor Screens

These screens display the status of the system and the MCM3320. The technician level of
security is required in a few screens to clear counters or reset values.
4.3.4.8 Fault Screens

These screens provide information about events and faults. It is also possible to reset faults in
these screens.
4.3.4.9 About Screens

These screens provide information about the software version used by different devices in the
system. The controller on-time is also available.
4.3.5
Levels of Security
TABLE 43.
LEVELS OF SECURITY
Level
Description
Guest
Operator
Technician
Factory
Guest is the default level of security.

Other levels of security require a user name and password.
4.3.5.1 Passwords
TABLE 44.
PASSWORDS
Level
Password
none
574
1209
not available
4.3.5.2 Auto-logout
The operator panel automatically returns to the guest level of security 15 minutes after the
password is entered correctly.
4.3.5.3 Level of Security Required for Each Screen

The top-level screens are available at all levels of security. Some lower-level screens require
passwords.
NOTE:
A029Y787 (Issue 1)
If a screen is not listed below, it is available at all levels of security.
49
4. Components
5-2012
TABLE 45.
LEVEL OF SECURITY REQUIRED FOR CONTROL SCREENS
Screen
Level of Security
Test, Settings
Extended Parallel, Settings
Load Demand
Load Add/Shed
TABLE 46.
LEVEL OF SECURITY REQUIRED FOR ADJUST SCREENS
Screen
Level of Security
AC Meter Adjustments
AC Meter Setup
Breakers
Communication
Configurable Outputs
Load Control
Power Transfer Control (PTC)
Synchronizer Check
Synchronizer Adjustments
System
Scheduler
Display
Load Demand
Load Add/Shed
Generator Set Bus Overload
Annunciator Configuration
TABLE 47.
LEVEL OF SECURITY REQUIRED FOR MONITOR SCREENS
Screen
Level of Security
AC Meter Adjustments, Generator Set Energy
AC Meter Adjustments, Utility Energy
Communication
4.4
Supplementary Interface Device (SID)

A supplementary interface device (SID) is the combination of an AUX 101 and its companion
AUX 102. Each SID is the interface for a certain range of generator sets and a certain range of
loads.
50
A029Y787 (Issue 1)
5-2012
4.4.1
4. Components
Generator Sets by SID

TABLE 48.
4.4.2
GENERATOR SETS BY SID
SID
Generator Sets
none
1-4
SID1
5-8
SID2
9-12
SID3
13-16
Loads by SID
NOTE:
SIDs are connected to loads, not load-add levels or load-shed levels.

TABLE 49.
4.4.3
LOADS BY SID
SID
Loads
SID0
1-6
SID1
7-10
SID2
11-14
SID3
15-18
SID Required
A SID is required if either of these conditions are met.
Gen N kW Rating is not equal to zero, where N is any generator set in the range for that
SID.
Load Add Shed Enable is Enabled, and Load N Device Type is not equal to None, where
N is any load in the range for that SID.
If a SID is required, the MCM must be able to communicate with the AUX 101 and AUX 102. If it
cannot communicate, the MCM cannot control the generator sets and loads to which the SID is
connected, and some features may not be active.
4.4.4
Legacy SID Override (Before V2.00)

Prior to firmware V2.00, it was possible to set up more than four generator sets in the MCM,
though the MCM could sense only four paralleling breakers. To handle this, some paralleling
breakers were connected in parallel with each other to the same set of pins on the MCM,
allowing the MCM to know when at least one of them is closed.
Starting with V2.00, it is not possible to have a different number of generator sets and
paralleling breakers. If V2.00 or later firmware is present in a legacy system that has more than
four generator sets and the generator set paralleling breakers are connected in parallel to the
MCM generator set main breaker position input, set Legacy SID Override to Enable. In this
case, no SIDs are required.
A029Y787 (Issue 1)
51
4. Components
4.4.5
5-2012
Compatible Software Versions (AUX 101)

TABLE 50.
4.4.6
COMPATIBLE SOFTWARE VERSIONS (AUX 101)
MCM3320
AUX 101
V2.00 or later
V1.48 or later
Configuring the AUX 101 and AUX 102 with the MCM3320
Set up the generator sets and the loads in the MCM3320. If the number of generator sets or
loads requires an AUX 101 and AUX 102, the MCM3320 expects the AUX 101 and AUX 102 to
be connected in a specific way, as indicated in the wiring diagrams.
4.4.7
Summary of Monitor Points (AUX 101/102)

TABLE 51.
SUMMARY OF MONITOR POINTS (AUX 101/102)
Setting
Description
SIDX Status (X = 0-3)
(Software v2.00 and later) Indicates the status of

communication between the MCM3320 and the AUX 101.
Possible values: Missing, Good, Connecting, No Exp
Board, Not Applicable
PCCnet Communications Status
(Prior to software v2.00) Indicates the status of

communication between the MCM3320 and the AUX 101.
Possible values: Failed, Good, Wait
PCCNet Status
(v2.00 and later) Indicates the status of PCCNet

communication.
Possible values: No Connection, Connecting, Connected
Expansion Board CommunicationsX (X = blank, 1, 2, 3)
Indicates whether or not the AUX 102 is detected.

Possible values: Disabled, Enabled
AUX101 Software Version (X = blank, 1, 2, 3)
Indicates the software version the AUX 101 is running.
Node Count for Remote IO
Indicates the number of AUX 101 the MCM3320 sees on

the PCCNet network.
Load X Input 1 (X = 1-18)
If the load type is ATS, this indicates whether or not the

emergency source is connected.
If the load type is Breaker, this indicates the position of
the A contact.
Possible values: Not Available, Open, Closed
Load X Input 2 (X = 1-18)
If the load type is ATS, this indicates whether or not the

normal source is connected.
If the load type is Breaker, this indicates the position of
the over current trip contact.
Possible values: Not Available, Open, Closed
SIDX Input (X = 0-3)
Provides the status of the AUX 101/102 inputs as

received by the MCM3320. This is the packet received by
the MCM3320, whereas the Load X Input settings indicate
the unpacked values.
SIDX Output 1/2 (X = 0-3)
Controls the status of the AUX 101/102 outputs as

requested by the MCM3320. This is the actual packet
sent by the MCM3320.
52
A029Y787 (Issue 1)
5-2012
4.4.8
4. Components
AUX 101 Board
FIGURE 36.
AUX 101 BOARD
4.4.8.1 AUX 101 S1

The S1 button can be used to change the AUX 101 device number.
4.4.8.2 AUX 101 Device Number Indicator

The AUX 101 device number indicator displays the device number of this particular AUX 101 in
a PCCNet network.
The device number must be unique in the PCCNet network.
4.4.8.3 AUX 101 Device Number by SID

TABLE 52.
A029Y787 (Issue 1)
AUX 101 DEVICE NUMBER BY SID
SID
AUX 101 Device Number
SID0
SID1
53
4. Components
5-2012
SID
AUX 101 Device Number
SID2
SID3
4.4.8.4 Changing the AUX 101 Device Number

1. Press and hold S1 for at least five seconds. On the AUX 101 device number indicator, a
small dot should appear next to the current device number.
2. Press and release S1 until the desired number is displayed.
3. Wait five seconds. After five seconds of inactivity, the new device number is set, and the
small dot should disappear.
4. Disconnect and reconnect J14 to cycle power to the AUX 101.
4.4.8.5 AUX 101 Indicators

TABLE 53.
Indicator
SID0
AUX 101 INDICATORS

SID1
SID2
SID3
DS1
This is on if the AUX 101 is connected to a PCCNet network and is operating normally.
DS2
This is on if the AUX 101 is not connected to the PCCNet network.
DS3
load 1 add
load 7 add
load 11 add
load 15 add
DS4
load 1 shed
load 7 shed
load 11 shed
load 15 shed
DS5
load 2 add
load 8 add
load 12 add
load 16 add
DS6
load 2 shed
load 8 shed
load 12 shed
load 16 shed
DS7
load 3 add
load 9 add
load 13 add
load 17 add
DS8
load 3 shed
load 9 shed
load 13 shed
load 17 shed
DS9
load 4 add
load 10 add
load 14 add
load 18 add
DS10
load 4 shed
load 10 shed
load 14 shed
load 18 shed
4.4.8.6 AUX 101 Connectors

TABLE 54.
Connector
SID0
J1
AUX 101 CONNECTORS

SID1
SID2
SID3
Connection to controller
J2
load 1 and load 2

add/shed
load 7 and load 8

add/shed
load 11 and load 12

add/shed
load 15 and load 16

add/shed
J3
load 3 add/shed
load 9 add/shed
load 13 add/shed
load 17 add/shed
J4
load 4 add/shed
load 10 add/shed
load 14 add/shed
load 18 add/shed
J5
J11
J14
Connection to AUX 102

load 1-4 input
load 7-10 input
load 11-14 input
load 15-18 input
Power supply
J10 is not connected in MCM3320 applications.
54
A029Y787 (Issue 1)
5-2012
4. Components
4.4.8.7 AUX 101 J1
Pin
Description
J1-1
Output power B-
J1-2
Output power B+
J1-3
PCCNet A
J1-4
PCCNet B
J1-5
System wakeup
FIGURE 37.
AUX 101 J1
TABLE 55.
AUX 101 J1
FIGURE 38.
AUX 101 J2
TABLE 56.
AUX 101 J2
4.4.8.8 AUX 101 J2
Pin
Contact
SID0
SID1
SID2
SID3
J2-1
normally-open
load 1 add
load 7 add
load 11 add
load 15 add
J2-2
common
J2-3
normally-closed
J2-4
normally-open
load 1 shed
load 7 shed
load 11 shed
load 15 shed
J2-5
common
J2-6
normally-closed
J2-7
normally-open
load 2 add
load 8 add
load 12 add
load 16 add
J2-8
common
A029Y787 (Issue 1)
55
4. Components
5-2012
Pin
Contact
J2-9
normally-closed
J2-10
normally-open
J2-11
common
J2-12
normally-closed
SID0
SID1
SID2
SID3
load 2 shed
load 8 shed
load 12 shed
load 16 shed
4.4.8.9 AUX 101 J3
FIGURE 39.
AUX 101 J3
TABLE 57.
AUX 101 J3
Pin
Contact
SID0
SID1
SID2
SID3
J3-1
normally-open
load 3 add
load 9 add
load 13 add
load 17 add
J3-2
common
J3-3
normally-closed
J3-4
normally-open
load 3 shed
load 9 shed
load 13 shed
load 17 shed
J3-5
common
J3-6
normally-closed
4.4.8.10 AUX 101 J4
FIGURE 40.
56
AUX 101 J4
A029Y787 (Issue 1)
5-2012
4. Components
TABLE 58.
AUX 101 J4
Pin
Contact
SID0
SID1
SID2
SID3
J4-1
normally-open
load 4 add
load 10 add
load 14 add
load 18 add
J4-2
common
J4-3
normally-closed
J4-4
normally-open
load 4 shed
load 10 shed
load 14 shed
load 18 shed
J4-5
common
J4-6
normally-closed
4.4.8.11 AUX 101 J5

If the AUX 101 is connected to an AUX 102, this is connected to J6 on the AUX 102.
FIGURE 41.
AUX 101 J5
There is no pin description for AUX 101 J5.
4.4.8.12 AUX 101 J11
FIGURE 42.
AUX 101 J11
TABLE 59.
AUX 101 J11
Pin
Contact
SID0
SID1
SID2
SID3
J11-1
reference input
load 1
load 7
load 11
load 15
J11-2
position A or
normal source
J11-3
reference input
J11-4
trip or emergency
source
A029Y787 (Issue 1)
57
4. Components
5-2012
Pin
Contact
SID0
SID1
SID2
SID3
J11-5
reference input
load 2
load 8
load 12
load 16
J11-6
position A or
normal source
J11-7
reference input
J11-8
trip or emergency
source
J11-9
reference input
load 3
load 9
load 13
load 17
J11-10
position A or
normal source
J11-11
reference input
J11-12
trip or emergency
source
J11-13
reference input
load 4
load 10
load 14
load 18
J11-14
position A or
normal source
J11-15
reference input
J11-16
trip or emergency
source
4.4.8.13 AUX 101 J14
Pin
58
FIGURE 43.
AUX 101 J14
TABLE 60.
AUX 101 J14
Description
J14-1
Input power B+
J14-2
Input power B-
A029Y787 (Issue 1)
5-2012
4.4.9
4. Components
AUX 102 Board
FIGURE 44.
AUX 102 BOARD
4.4.9.1 AUX 102 Indicators

TABLE 61.
AUX 102 INDICATORS
Indicator
SID0
SID1
SID2
SID3
DS1
load 5 add
load demand
generator set 5
load demand
generator set 9
load demand
generator set 13
DS2
load 5 shed
load demand
generator set 6
load demand
generator set 10
load demand
generator set 14
DS3
load 6 add
load demand
generator set 7
load demand
generator set 11
load demand
generator set 15
DS4
load 6 shed
load demand
generator set 8
load demand
generator set 12
load demand
generator set 16
DS5
not used
DS6
not used
DS7
not used
DS8
not used
A029Y787 (Issue 1)
59
4. Components
5-2012
4.4.9.2 AUX 102 Connectors

TABLE 62.
AUX 102 CONNECTORS
Connector
SID0
SID1
SID2
SID3
J1
load 5-6 add/shed,

normally-open
load demand
generator set 5-8,
normally-open
load demand
generator set 9-12,
normally-open
load demand
generator set 13-16,
normally-open
J2
load 5-6 add/shed,

common
load demand
generator set 5-8,
common
load demand
generator set 9-12,
common
load demand
common
J3
load 5-6 add/shed,

normally-closed
load demand
generator set 5-8,
normally-closed
load demand
generator set 9-12,
normally-closed
load demand
normally-closed
J4
load 5-6 input
generator set 5-8

paralleling breaker
position
generator set 9-12

paralleling breaker
position
generator set 13-16

paralleling breaker
position
J5
Chassis ground
J6
Connection to AUX 101
4.4.9.3 AUX 102 J1
FIGURE 45.
AUX 102 J1
J1 provides normally-open contacts for the output relays.

TABLE 63.
60
AUX 102 J1
Pin
SID0
SID1
SID2
SID3
J1-1
load 5 add
load demand
generator set 5
load demand
generator set 9
load demand
generator set 13
J1-2
load 5 shed
load demand
generator set 6
load demand
generator set 10
load demand
generator set 14
J1-3
load 6 add
load demand
generator set 7
load demand
generator set 11
load demand
generator set 15
J1-4
load 6 shed
load demand
generator set 8
load demand
generator set 12
load demand
generator set 18
J1-5
not used
J1-6
not used
J1-7
not used
J1-8
not used
A029Y787 (Issue 1)
5-2012
4. Components
4.4.9.4 AUX 102 J2
FIGURE 46.
AUX 102 J2
J2 provides common contacts for the output relays.

TABLE 64.
AUX 102 J2
Pin
SID0
SID1
SID2
SID3
J2-1
load 5 add
load demand
generator set 5
load demand
generator set 9
load demand
generator set 13
J2-2
load 5 shed
load demand
generator set 6
load demand
generator set 10
load demand
generator set 14
J2-3
load 6 add
load demand
generator set 7
load demand
generator set 11
load demand
generator set 15
J2-4
load 6 shed
load demand
generator set 8
load demand
generator set 12
load demand
generator set 18
J2-5
not used
J2-6
not used
J2-7
not used
J2-8
not used
4.4.9.5 AUX 102 J3
FIGURE 47.
AUX 102 J3
J3 provides normally-closed contacts for the output relays.
A029Y787 (Issue 1)
61
4. Components
5-2012
TABLE 65.
AUX 102 J3
Pin
SID0
SID1
SID2
SID3
J3-1
load 5 add
load demand
generator set 5
load demand
generator set 9
load demand
generator set 13
J3-2
load 5 shed
load demand
generator set 6
load demand
generator set 10
load demand
generator set 14
J3-3
load 6 add
load demand
generator set 7
load demand
generator set 11
load demand
generator set 15
J3-4
load 6 shed
load demand
generator set 8
load demand
generator set 12
load demand
generator set 18
J3-5
not used
J3-6
not used
J3-7
not used
J3-8
not used
4.4.9.6 AUX 102 J4
FIGURE 48.
AUX 102 J4
TABLE 66.
AUX 102 J4
Pin
SID0
SID1
SID2
SID3
J4-1
load 5 position A or
normal source
connected
generator set 5
paralleling breaker
position
generator set 9
paralleling breaker
position
generator set 13
paralleling breaker
position
J4-2
J4-3
reference input
load 5 trip or
emergency source
connected
J4-4
J4-5
J4-8
62
generator set 10
paralleling breaker
position
generator set 14
paralleling breaker
position
reference input
load 6 position A or
normal source
connected
J4-6
J4-7
generator set 6
paralleling breaker
position
generator set 7
paralleling breaker
position
generator set 11
paralleling breaker
position
generator set 15
paralleling breaker
position
reference input
load 6 trip or
emergency source
connected
generator set 8
paralleling breaker
position
generator set 12
paralleling breaker
position
generator set 16
paralleling breaker
position
reference input
A029Y787 (Issue 1)
5-2012
4. Components
4.4.9.7 AUX 102 J5

J5 is connected to a good earth ground.
4.4.9.8 AUX 102 J6

This is connected to J5 on the AUX 101.
FIGURE 49.
AUX 102 J6
There is no pin description for AUX 102 J6.
4.4.10 Troubleshooting
4.4.10.1 DS1 and DS2 Are Off
DS1 and DS2 are off, but the board should have power.
A. Checking the Power Connections

Make sure the power supply wires are connected securely.
B. Checking the Wires

Measure the resistance of each wire.
If the resistance is greater than 10 , check any fuses or breakers in the harness.
Otherwise, replace the wire.
C. Checking the Power Supply

Measure the voltage provided by the power supply.
If the voltage is outside the allowed range, troubleshoot the power supply.
4.4.10.2 DS2 Is On
DS2 is on, but the board should be connected to a PCCNet network.
A. Checking the PCCNet Connections

Make sure the PCCNet wires are connected securely to J1-3 (PCCNet A) and J1-4
(PCCNet B).
B. Checking the Wires

Measure the resistance of each wire.
If the resistance is greater than 10 , replace the wire.
A029Y787 (Issue 1)
63
4. Components
5-2012
C. Checking the Device to Which the Board Is Connected

If the device does not appear to be communicating on its port, troubleshoot the device.
4.4.11 Connecting to an AUX 101 or AUX 102 Using InPower

You can use InPower to update the firmware in the AUX 101 or AUX 102. Connect to the AUX
101 using J1.
You cannot connect directly to an AUX 102 using InPower. You should connect to the AUX 101
to which the AUX 102 is connected instead.

circuit boards.
4.5
Bar Graphs
The MCM tells the bar graphs which indicator should be lit for each value.
The MCM supports two bar graphs, one for the generator set bus and one for the utility bus.
4.5.1
Generator Set Bus Current Percentage

This value assumes that 100% current is equal to Total System Capacity / (3 x Genset
Nominal Voltage x 0.8).
The calculation does not use the measured power factor. Instead, it uses a power factor of 0.8.
4.5.2
Utility Current Percentage

Utility Available Current should be set to 100% current.
4.5.3
Utility Total kW Percentage

Total Utility Capacity should be set to 100% rated real power.
4.5.4
Compatible Software Versions (Bar Graph)

TABLE 67.
4.5.5
COMPATIBLE SOFTWARE VERSIONS (BAR GRAPH)
MCM3320
Bar Graph
V2.01 or later
V1.80 or later
Setting up a Bar Graph

1. On the back of the bar graph, press the S1 button, and hold it until one or more indicators
are lit in the lower right corner on the front of the bar graph. Typically, you have to hold the
S1 button for about five seconds.
64
A029Y787 (Issue 1)
5-2012
4. Components
FIGURE 50.
S1 BUTTON (BACK OF THE BAR GRAPH)
2. When one or more indicators are lit, press the S1 button once to change the number of
indicators that are lit. Keep pressing the S1 button until the number of indicators is correct
for the application.
NOTE:
TABLE 68.
If you do not press the S1 button for 5 seconds, the bar graph returns to
normal operation. Return to step 1.
BAR GRAPH APPLICATION BASED ON NUMBER OF INDICATORS
Number of Indicators
Application
Generator set bus
Utility bus
3. When the number of indicators is correct, wait 5 seconds for the bar graph to return to
normal operation.
If you are setting up a bar graph for the utility bus, follow these steps as well.
1. Connect InPower to the MCM3320.
2. In InPower, right-click on the MCM3320, and select MCM3320 Setup.... The MCM3320
setup screens should appear.
3. In the MCM3320 setup screens, go to Meter setup.
A029Y787 (Issue 1)
65
4. Components
5-2012
FIGURE 51.
METER SETUP SCREEN
4. In the Utility bargraph setup section, set the scaling for the bar graph.
5. Save your changes.
This is not necessary if you set up a bar graph for the generator set bus.
4.6
Universal Annunciator
The MCM configures the universal annunciator and tells the universal annunciator which
indicators should be lit.
The MCM does not support the customer relays on the universal annunciator.
4.6.1
Compatible Software Versions (Universal Annunciator)

TABLE 69.
4.6.2
COMPATIBLE SOFTWARE VERSIONS (UNIVERSAL ANNUNCIATOR)

MCM3320
Universal Annunciator
V2.01 or later
V2.10 or later
Basic Status Annunciator

This annunciator shows the general status of the system, including source availability, source
connections, generator sets online, etc.
4.6.2.1 Basic Status Annunciator Configuration

The number of annunciators and the information that is displayed on each one depends on the
number of generator sets. Set Basic Status Annunciator Configuration based on the number of
generator sets that the annunciator monitors.
66
A029Y787 (Issue 1)
5-2012
4. Components
TABLE 70.
BASIC STATUS ANNUNCIATORS
Indicator
Generator Sets 1-4
Generator Sets 1-8
Generator Sets 9-16
Utility Available
Utility Available
Generator Set 9 Running
Utility Connected
Utility Connected
Generator Set Bus

Available
Generator Set Bus

Available
Generator Set Bus

Connected
Generator Set Bus

Connected
Not in Auto
Not in Auto
Common Alarm
Common Alarm
Fail to Synchronize
Fail to Synchronize
Configurable Indicator
10
11
12
Test
13
Extended Parallel
14
Generator Set Bus

Overload
15
Load Demand
16
Test
17
Extended Parallel
18
Generator Set Bus

Overload
19
Load Demand
20
If the annunciators monitor 9 or more generator sets, two annunciators are required, one for
generator sets 1-8 and one for generator sets 9-16.
4.6.2.2 Configurable Indicators

Configurable indicators can be assigned to any code. If the code is active, the indicator is on.
The color, flashing, and audible alert can also be configured.
For generator sets 1-8, use the Configurable Annunciator LED ## settings to set up configurable
indicators.
For generator sets 9-16, use the Basic Annunciator 2 LED ## settings to set up configurable
indicators.
4.6.2.3 Configurable Indicator 20 in the Operator Panel

If the annunciators monitor 9 or more generator sets, both annunciators (generator sets 1-8 and
generator sets 9-16) have a configurable indicator 20. The operator panel has only one screen
for configurable indicator 20, and this screen displays the settings for configurable indicator 20
in the second annunciator (generator sets 9-16).
A029Y787 (Issue 1)
67
4. Components
5-2012
The settings for configurable indicator 20 in the first annunciator (generator sets 1-8) are
available if Basic Status Annunciator Configuration is temporarily set to Up to 8 Gens instead of
Up to 16 Gens.
4.6.2.4 Setting up a Basic Status Annunciator

NOTE:
Only one annunciator should be connected to the MCM3320 on the PCCNet

network during setup.

3. In the MCM3320 setup screens, go to Annunciator Setup.
FIGURE 52.
ANNUNCIATOR SETUP SCREEN
4. In the Annunciator Type field, select "Basic Annunciator". The Total number of Gensets
in the system field should appear.
FIGURE 53.
68
TOTAL NUMBER OF GENERATOR SETS IN THE SYSTEM
A029Y787 (Issue 1)
5-2012
4. Components
5. In the Total number of Gensets in the system field, select the number of generator sets
that will be monitored.
If 9 or more generator sets will be monitored, the Select Basic Annunciator field should
appear. Select which annunciator will be setup at this time.
FIGURE 54.
SELECT BASIC ANNUNCIATOR FIELD
Otherwise, go to the next step.

6. In the Basic Annunciator Setup section, set up the configurable indicators for the
annunciator.
7. Click Save Adjustments.
8. On the annunciator, press Silence/Lamp Test. In the Annunciator Configuration section,
the Configuration status should be "Annun Ready for Config".
FIGURE 55.
ANNUNCIATOR READY FOR CONFIGURATION
9. In the Annunciator Configuration section, set Perform Annunciator Configuration to

"Config to Basic Statuses". During configuration, the Configuration status should be
"Performing Configuration".
10. Follow the instructions. At the end of the process, the Configuration status should be
"Annunciator Successfully configured".
FIGURE 56.
ANNUNCIATOR SUCCESSFULLY CONFIGURED
You do not have to click Save Adjustments.
4.6.3
Load Add/Shed Annunciator

This annunciator indicates which load-add levels are being connected and which load-shed
levels are being removed. This is based on load add/shed commands, not the actual status of
the loads. This annunciator does not indicate whether or not the loads are actually connected.
A029Y787 (Issue 1)
69
4. Components
5-2012
4.6.3.1 Load Add/Shed Annunciator Configuration

The number of annunciators and the information that is displayed on each one depends on the
number of load add/shed levels, not loads. Set Load Add Shed Annunciator Configuration based
on the number of load add/shed levels that the annunciator monitors.
TABLE 71.
LOAD ADD/SHED ANNUNCIATORS
Indicator
Levels 1-6
Levels 1-10
Levels 1-18
Add Level 1 On
Add Level 1 On
Add Level 11 On
Add Level 2 On
Add Level 2 On
Add Level 12 On
Add Level 3 On
Add Level 3 On
Add Level 13 On
Add Level 4 On
Add Level 4 On
Add Level 14 On
Add Level 5 On
Add Level 5 On
Add Level 15 On
Add Level 6 On
Add Level 6 On
Add Level 16 On
Shed Level 1 On
Add Level 7 On
Add Level 17 On
Shed Level 2 On
Add Level 8 On
Add Level 18 On
Shed Level 3 On
Add Level 9 On
Shed Level 10 On
10
Shed Level 4 On
Add Level 10 On
Shed Level 11 On
11
Shed Level 5 On
Shed Level 1 On
Shed Level 12 On
12
Not used
Shed Level 2 On
Shed Level 13 On
13
Not used
Shed Level 3 On
Shed Level 14 On
14
Not used
Shed Level 4 On
Shed Level 15 On
15
Not used
Shed Level 5 On
Shed Level 16 On
16
Not used
Shed Level 6 On
Shed Level 17 On
17
Not used
Shed Level 7 On
Not used
18
Not used
Shed Level 8 On
Not used
19
Not used
Shed Level 9 On
Not used
20
Not used
Not used
Not used
If the system has 11 or more levels, two annunciators are required, one for levels 1-10 and one
for levels 11-18.
4.6.3.2 Add Level Command

This command indicates whether or not load add/shed is trying to connect the loads assigned to
a specific load-add level.
The command becomes active when the loads are added during automatic load add and
remains active until the generator sets are disconnected.
The command becomes active when the loads are added during utility load add begins
and remains active until the utility is disconnected.
The command becomes active when the loads are added during manual load add and
remains active until the generator sets are disconnected.
70
A029Y787 (Issue 1)
5-2012
4. Components
NOTE:
It is possible for the add level command and the shed level command to be
active for the same load at the same time. For example, the load is added by
automatic load add and then removed by automatic load shed when the
generator sets are overloaded. If this occurs, the add level command is
ignored, and the load is removed.
4.6.3.3 Shed Level Command

This command indicates whether or not load add/shed is trying to remove the loads assigned to
a specific load-shed level from the generator sets or the utility.
The command becomes active when the loads are removed during an open-transition
transfer, for example, when the utility is no longer available. The command remains active
until automatic load add begins.
The command becomes active when the loads are removed because code 1444 (Genset
Bus Overload) is active. The command remains active until the generator sets are
disconnected.
If Open Transition Retransfer Load Shed Enable is Enabled, the command becomes active
when the loads are removed during an open-transition retransfer. It remains active until
utility load add begins.
The command becomes active when the loads are removed during manual load shed. It
remains active until the loads are restored or until the generator sets are disconnected.
NOTE:
It is possible for the add level command and the shed level command to be
active for the same load at the same time. For example, the load is added by
automatic load add and then removed by automatic load shed when the
generator sets are overloaded. If this occurs, the add level command is
ignored, and the load is removed.
4.6.3.4 Unused Indicators

Unused indicators can be hardwired if desired. See the manual for the universal annunciator.
4.6.3.5 Setting up a Load Add/Shed Annunciator

NOTE:


3. In the MCM3320 setup screens, go to Annunciator Setup.
A029Y787 (Issue 1)
71
4. Components
5-2012
FIGURE 57.
ANNUNCIATOR SETUP SCREEN
4. In the Annunciator Type field, select "Load Add Shed(LAS) Annunciator". The Total
number of LAS Levels in the system field should appear.
FIGURE 58.
TOTAL NUMBER OF LOAD ADD/SHED LEVELS IN THE SYSTEM
5. In the Total number of LAS Levels in the system field, select the number of load
add/shed levels that will be monitored.
If 11 or more load add/shed levels will be monitored, the Select Load Add Shed
Annunciator field should appear. Select which annunciator will be setup at this time.
FIGURE 59.
72
SELECT LOAD ADD/SHED ANNUNCIATOR FIELD
A029Y787 (Issue 1)
5-2012
4. Components
Otherwise, go to the next step.

6. On the annunciator, press Silence/Lamp Test. In the Annunciator Configuration section,
the Configuration status should be "Annun Ready for Config".
FIGURE 60.
ANNUNCIATOR READY FOR CONFIGURATION
7. In the Annunciator Configuration section, set Perform Annunciator Configuration to

"Config to Load Add Shed Load statuses". During configuration, the Configuration status
should be "Performing Configuration".
8. Follow the instructions. At the end of the process, the Configuration status should be
"Annunciator Successfully configured".
FIGURE 61.
ANNUNCIATOR SUCCESSFULLY CONFIGURED
You do not have to click Save Adjustments.
4.6.4
Setting up an Annunciator Using the Operator Panel

You can set up an annunciator using the operator panel. Unlike InPower, the operator panel
does not provide on-screen instructions or announce errors.
NOTE:

This procedure describes the main steps.

1. Go to the Config Annun screens. In V1.20, go to Menu > Adjust > More Options (5
times) > 16) Config Annun.
2. Set Annun Type to Basic for a basic status annunciator or to Load Add Shed for a load
add/shed annunciator.
3. For a basic status annunciator, set Basic Annun Type. If the number of generator sets is 9
or more, set Basic Annun Type to "Upto 8 Gens" for the first annunciator or "Upto 16
Gens" for the second annunciator.
For a load add/shed annunciator, set LAS Annun Type. If the number of load add/shed
levels is 11 or more, set LAS Annun Type to "Upto 10 Lvls" for the first annunciator or
"Upto 18 Lvls" for the second annunciator.
4. Press Save.
5. Set up the configurable indicators in the Config LED screens.
A029Y787 (Issue 1)
73
4. Components
5-2012
6. Press Save.
7. Go to the Perform Config screen, and press Adjust.
8. On the annunciator, press Silence/Lamp Test. Config Status should change to "Annun
Ready".
9. For a basic status annunciator, set Perform Config to "Basic Status".
For a load add/shed annunciator, set Perform Config to "LD Add Shed".
10. Press Save. At the end of the process, Config Status should change to "Config Success".
11. Disconnect J2 on the annunciator.
12. Wait 15 seconds.
13. Reconnect J2 on the annunciator.
74
A029Y787 (Issue 1)
Source Availability
Source availability refers to whether or not a source is ready to accept loads.
5.1
Power Transfer Control (PTC) Sensors

A PTC sensor looks for a specific condition, such as undervoltage or frequency, that indicates
that a source is not ready to accept loads.
Each sensor has one of these values.
Unknown: The sensor is disabled.
Dropped-out: The sensor has detected the condition for which it looks. For example, if the
generator set undervoltage sensor is Dropped-out, the generator set voltage is too low.
Many sensors require the condition to occur for a specific amount of time before the sensor
becomes Dropped-out.
Picked-up: The sensor has not detected the condition for which it looks. For example, if the
utility frequency sensor is Picked-up, the utility frequency is within an acceptable range.
Many PTC sensors are conditions for faults. For example, if the utility frequency sensor
becomes Dropped-out, code 1123 (Utility Bus Frequency) becomes active.
A PTC sensor and any associated faults operate independently of each other. The status of the
PTC sensor depends on the settings for the specific condition that is being monitored. The
status of the fault depends on all of its fault conditions, which may include conditions other than
the sensor's being Dropped-out, as well as the fault reset. PTC sensors, not faults, are used to
determine source availability.
NOTE:
5.1.1
Many PTC sensors are conditions for faults. A PTC sensor and any
associated faults operate independently of each other. PTC sensors, not
faults, are used to determine source availability.
Generator Set Undervoltage Sensor

This sensor is always enabled.
A029Y787 (Issue 1)
75
5. Source Availability
5-2012
Time (t)
initial
Event
Sensor Status
The line-to-line voltage (V) is acceptable.
Picked-Up
t1
The line-to-line voltage (V) falls below the dropped-out threshold

(D, Genset Undervoltage Drop-Out Percentage * Genset
Undervoltage Pick-Up Percentage).
Picked-Up
t1+tD
The line-to-line voltage (V) remains below the dropped-out

threshold (D) for a specified time delay (tD, Genset Undervoltage
Drop-Out Delay).
Dropped-Out
(shaded area)
t2
The line-to-line voltage (V) rises above the picked-up threshold (P,
Genset Undervoltage Pick-Up Percentage).
FIGURE 62.
Picked-Up
GENERATOR SET UNDERVOLTAGE SENSOR
When the synchronizer is active, Genset Undervoltage Drop-Out Percentage is temporarily set
to 75%, and Genset Undervoltage Pick-Up Percentage is temporarily set to 85%. This prevents
the synchronizer from causing nuisance faults.
5.1.2
Generator Set Overvoltage Sensor

Genset Overvoltage Sensor Enable must be set to Enable.
76
A029Y787 (Issue 1)
5-2012
Time (t)
initial
t1
t1+tD
t2
Event
Sensor Status
Picked-Up
The line-to-line voltage (V) rises above the dropped-out threshold

(D, Genset Overvoltage Drop-Out Percentage).
Picked-Up
The line-to-line voltage (V) remains above the dropped-out

threshold (D) for a specified time delay (tD, Genset Overvoltage
Drop-Out Delay).
The line-to-line voltage (V) falls below the picked-up threshold (P,
Genset Overvoltage Pick-Up Percentage * Genset Overvoltage
Drop-Out Percentage).
FIGURE 63.
Dropped-Out
(shaded area)
Picked-Up
GENERATOR SET OVERVOLTAGE SENSOR
When the synchronizer is active, Genset Overvoltage Drop-Out Percentage is temporarily set to
120%, and Genset Overvoltage Pick-Up Percentage is temporarily set to 95%. This prevents the
synchronizer from causing nuisance faults.
5.1.3
Generator Set Frequency Sensor

Genset Frequency Sensor Enable must be set to Enable.
A029Y787 (Issue 1)
77
5-2012
Time (t)
initial
t1
t1+tD
t2
Event
Sensor Status
The frequency (Hz) is acceptable.
Picked-Up
The frequency (Hz) rises above the dropped-out threshold [upper

graph D, Genset Center Frequency + (Genset Frequency Pick-Up
Bandwidth + Genset Frequency Drop-Out Bandwidth)].
OR
The frequency (Hz) falls below the dropped-out threshold [lower
graph D, Genset Center Frequency - (Genset Frequency Pick-Up
Picked-Up
The frequency (Hz) remains above or below the dropped-out

threshold (D) for a specified time delay (tD, Genset Frequency
Drop-Out Delay).
The frequency (Hz) falls below the picked-up threshold (P, Genset
Center Frequency + Genset Frequency Pick-Up Bandwidth).
AND
The frequency (Hz) rises above the picked-up threshold (P,
Genset Center Frequency - Genset Frequency Pick-Up
Bandwidth).
FIGURE 64.
Dropped-Out
(shaded area)
Picked-Up
GENERATOR SET FREQUENCY SENSOR
When the synchronizer is active, Genset Frequency Drop-Out Bandwidth is temporarily set to
5%, and Genset Frequency Pick-Up Bandwidth is temporarily set to 20%. This prevents the
78
A029Y787 (Issue 1)
5-2012
5.1.4
Generator Set Loss of Phase Sensor

TABLE 72.
GENERATOR SET LOSS OF PHASE SENSOR
Sensor enable
Genset Loss of Phase Sensor Enable is Enable

Minimum line-to-line voltage > 60% nominal voltage
Frequency > 30 Hz
Condition for drop-out
Phase difference between any two phases < 90

or phase difference between any two phases > 150
Time delay before drop-out
Genset Loss of Phase Drop-Out Delay
Condition for pick-up
90 <= phase difference between all phases <= 150
5.1.5
Generator Set Phase Rotation Sensor

TABLE 73.
GENERATOR SET PHASE ROTATION SENSOR
Sensor enable
Genset Phase Rotation Sensor Enable is Enable

Frequency > 30 Hz
Genset Phase Rotation <> System Phase Rotation
1 second
Genset Phase Rotation = System Phase Rotation
5.1.6
Utility Undervoltage Sensor

A029Y787 (Issue 1)
79
5-2012
Time (t)
initial
t1
t1+tD
t2
Event
Picked-Up

(D, Utility Undervoltage Drop-Out Percentage * Utility
Picked-Up

threshold (D) for a specified time delay (tD, Utility Undervoltage
Drop-Out Delay).
Utility Undervoltage Pick-Up Percentage).
FIGURE 65.
5.1.7
Sensor Status
Dropped-Out
(shaded area)
Picked-Up
UTILITY UNDERVOLTAGE SENSOR
Utility Overvoltage Sensor

Utility Overvoltage Sensor Enable must be set to Enable.
80
A029Y787 (Issue 1)
5-2012
Time (t)
initial
t1
t1+tD
t2
Event
Picked-Up

(D, Utility Overvoltage Drop-Out Percentage).
Picked-Up

threshold (D) for a specified time delay (tD, Utility Overvoltage
Drop-Out Delay).
Utility Overvoltage Pick-Up Percentage * Utility Overvoltage DropOut Percentage).
FIGURE 66.
5.1.8
Sensor Status
Dropped-Out
(shaded area)
Picked-Up
UTILITY OVERVOLTAGE SENSOR
Utility Frequency Sensor

Utility Frequency Sensor Enable must be set to Enable.
A029Y787 (Issue 1)
81
5-2012
Time (t)
initial
Event
Picked-Up
t1

graph D, Utility Center Frequency + (Utility Frequency Pick-Up
Bandwidth + Utility Frequency Drop-Out Bandwidth)].
OR
graph D, Utility Center Frequency - (Utility Frequency Pick-Up
Picked-Up
t1+tD

threshold (D) for a specified time delay (tD, Utility Frequency DropOut Delay).
Dropped-Out
(shaded area)
t2
The frequency (Hz) falls below the picked-up threshold (P, Utility
Center Frequency + Utility Frequency Pick-Up Bandwidth).
AND
The frequency (Hz) remains above the picked-up threshold (P,
Utility Center Frequency - Utility Frequency Pick-Up Bandwidth).
FIGURE 67.
82
Sensor Status
Picked-Up
UTILITY FREQUENCY SENSOR
A029Y787 (Issue 1)
5-2012
5.1.9
Utility Loss of Phase Sensor

TABLE 74.
UTILITY LOSS OF PHASE SENSOR
Sensor enable
Utility Loss of Phase Sensor Enable is Enable

Frequency > 30 Hz

Utility Loss of Phase Drop-Out Delay
5.1.10 Utility Phase Rotation Sensor

TABLE 75.
UTILITY PHASE ROTATION SENSOR
Sensor enable
Utility Phase Rotation Sensor Enable is Enable

Frequency > 30 Hz
Utility Phase Rotation <> System Phase Rotation
1 second
Utility Phase Rotation = System Phase Rotation
5.2
Generator Set Availability

Generator set availability refers to whether or not the generator sets as a group are ready to
accept loads.
5.2.1
Generator Set Availability (Three-phase Applications in

Isolated Bus Without Generator Set Main Breaker and
Common Bus Topologies)
The generator sets are available when one of these conditions is met.
The generator sets are not connected to the loads, but the generator sets have been
commanded to start.
The generator sets are connected to the loads, and none of the PTC sensors for the
generator sets are Dropped-out.
The generator sets remain available until at least one of these conditions is met.
The generator sets are not connected to the loads, and the generator sets are commanded
to stop.
The generator sets have been connected to the loads for 15 seconds, and at least one of
the PTC sensors is Dropped-out.
Code 1328 (Generator Set Main Breaker Tripped) is active.
Code 1452 (Generator Set Main Breaker Fail to Close) is active.
A029Y787 (Issue 1)
83
5.2.2
5-2012
Generator Set Availability (Three-phase Applications in

Isolated Bus with Generator Set Main Breaker and
Transfer Pair Topologies)
The generator sets are available when all of these conditions are met.
None of the PTC sensors for the generator sets are Dropped-out.
Genset Online Capacity Sensor Status is not Dropped-out.
Code 1328 (Generator Set Main Breaker Tripped) is not active.
Code 1454 (Generator Set Breaker Position Contact) is not active.
Code 1452 (Generator Set Main Breaker Fail to Close) is not active.
The generator sets are not available when at least one of these conditions is not met. If code
1454 is active, the generator sets are unavailable only if the generator set main breaker is a
dual-contact breaker and Genset Current Based Breaker Position is Unknown.
5.2.3
Generator Set Online Capacity Sensor

Genset Online Capacity Sensor Status indicates whether or not there is enough generator set
capacity to accept loads. If there is not enough capacity, the generator sets are not considered
available. This avoids transferring the loads to the generator sets only to overload them.
The amount of capacity that is required depends on the situation.
In a hard-closed transition during a test with load, the amount of capacity must be greater
than or equal to the current system load.
If Genset Online Capacity Sensor Selection is Enable, the amount of capacity must be
greater than or equal to Genset Online Capacity Sensor Threshold.
If both situations occur, both conditions must be met. If neither situation occurs, the requirement
is ignored.
If there is enough generator set capacity, the Genset Online Capacity Sensor Status is PickedUp. Otherwise, it is Dropped-Out.
5.3
Utility Availability
Utility availability refers to whether or not the utility is ready to accept loads.
5.3.1
Utility Availability (Three-phase Applications in Common

Bus and Transfer Pair Topologies)
The utility is available when all of these conditions are met.
None of the PTC sensors for the utility are Dropped-out.
The utility source failure switch is inactive.
Code 1219 (Utility Main Breaker Tripped) is not active.
Code 1455 (Utility Main Breaker Position Contact) is not active.
Code 2396 (Utility Main Breaker Fail to Close) is not active.
84
A029Y787 (Issue 1)
5-2012
The utility is not available when at least one of these conditions is not met. If code 1455 is
active, the utility is unavailable only if the utility main breaker is a dual-contact breaker and
Utility Current Based Breaker Position is Unknown.
5.3.2
Utility Source Failure Switch

This switch is used by an external device that determines whether or not the utility is available.
If this switch is active, the utility is not available.
If there is no external device, this switch should be inactive.
This switch is available in three-phase applications if the topology is Isolated Bus Without
Generator Set Main Breaker, Isolated Bus with Generator Set Main Breaker, Common Bus, or
Transfer Pair. It has no effect in other applications or topologies.
5.4
Current Based Breaker Position

This is a calculation of breaker position based on the current through the breaker. If the current
in all phases is at least Breaker Closed Current Threshold, the breaker is considered closed.
Otherwise, the breaker position is considered unknown.
This check is used to verify the position of single-contact breakers. If the current-based breaker
position disagrees with the pins, the breaker position contact fault is active.
For dual-contact breakers, this check is used to determine utility availability and generator set
availability if the two sets of contacts disagree about the breaker position.
If a breaker position contact fault is active and the current-based breaker position is closed, the
system generates a transfer inhibit or a retransfer inhibit internally to avoid closing the other
breaker. For example, if code 1454 (Genset Main Breaker Position Contact Warning) is active
and Genset Current Based Breaker Position is Closed, the retransfer inhibit is active. This type
of transfer inhibit or retransfer inhibit is not affected by the override switch.
5.5
Summary of Settings (Source Availability)

TABLE 76.
SUMMARY OF SETTINGS (SOURCE AVAILABILITY)
Setting
Description
Breaker Closed Current Threshold
Specifies the minimum amount of current that must be

present in all phases for the breaker to be considered
closed. It is used in certain situations to verify the position
indicated by the breaker position contact.
Possible values: 5-100% (Default: 5%)
Genset Online Capacity Sensor Enable
Enables or disables Genset Online Capacity Sensor

Threshold. Genset Online Capacity Sensor Status
operates during hard-closed transitions regardless of this
setting.
Possible values: Disable, Enable (Default: Disable)
Genset Online Capacity Sensor Threshold
Specifies the minimum amount of generator set capacity

that must be online before the generator sets are
considered available.
Possible values: 0-32000 kW (Default: 0 kW)
Utility Source Failure Vol
Sets the utility source failure switch.

Possible values: Inactive, Active
A029Y787 (Issue 1)
85
TABLE 77.
5-2012
SUMMARY OF MONITOR POINTS (SOURCE AVAILABILITY)
Setting
Description
Utility Source Failure Sw
Indicates the status of the utility source failure switch.
Genset Current Based Breaker Position
Indicates the current position of the generator set main

breaker based on Breaker Closed Current Threshold.
Possible values: Unknown, Closed
Utility Current Based Breaker Position
Indicates the current position of the utility main breaker

based on Breaker Closed Current Threshold.
Possible values: Unknown, Closed
Genset Online Capacity Sensor Selection
Indicates whether or not any conditions for Genset Online

Capacity Sensor Status are active. Possible conditions
include Genset Online Capacity Sensor Enable and hardclosed transitions.
Possible values: Disable, Enable
Genset Online Capacity Sensor Status
Indicates the status of the generator set online capacity

sensor.
Possible values: Unknown, Picked-Up, Dropped-Out
86
A029Y787 (Issue 1)
Power Transfer Control (PTC) State

PTC State identifies which sources are connected to the loads.
TABLE 78.
6.1
PTC STATE
Generator Sets
Utility
PTC State
Disconnected
Disconnected
No Source Connected
Disconnected
Connected
Utility Connected
Connected
Disconnected
Genset Connected
Connected
Connected
Paralleled
Generator Sets Connected

If the topology is Isolated Bus Without Generator Set Main Breaker or Common Bus, the
generator sets are connected if any of the generator set paralleling breakers is closed. The
generator sets are not connected if all of the generator set paralleling breakers are open.
In other topologies, the generator sets are connected if the generator set main breaker is
closed. The generator sets are not connected if the generator set main breaker is open.
If the generator set main breaker is a dual-contact breaker and code 1454 (Generator Set
Breaker Position Contact) is active, the generator set main breaker is considered closed, and
the generator sets are connected. Genset Current Based Breaker Position is not used in this
determination.
6.1.1
Connecting the Generator Sets

generator sets are connected to the loads by releasing the inhibit on the generator set
paralleling breakers. The generator set paralleling breakers may not close immediately because
they are controlled by the generator sets.
In other topologies, the generator sets are connected to the loads by sending a close signal to
the generator set main breaker. This signal remains active until the generator sets are
connected.
In any topology, the generator sets cannot be connected if code 1455 (Utility Main Breaker
Position Contact) is active.
6.1.2
Disconnecting the Generator Sets

generator sets are disconnected from the loads by inhibiting the generator set paralleling
breakers.
In other topologies, the generator sets are disconnected from the loads by sending an open
signal to the generator set main breaker. This signal remains active until the generator sets are
disconnected.
A029Y787 (Issue 1)
87
6. Power Transfer Control (PTC) State
6.1.3
5-2012
Generator Set Connections and Legacy SID Override

NOTE:
Legacy SID Override should be used only in existing installations where the
generator set paralleling breakers are connected in parallel. It should not be
used in new systems.
If Legacy SID Override is Enable, the generator set paralleling breakers are connected in
parallel to the pins of the generator set main breaker. In this case, the connection is treated like
a generator set main breaker. If the generator set main breaker is a dual-contact breaker and
the two sets of contacts disagree about the position, the generator sets are considered
connected, and code 1454 (Genset Main Breaker Position Contact) is active.
6.1.4

This switch may come from any of these sources:
Generator Set Breaker Inhibit connection (TB10-5, TB10-4)
Modbus networks
InPower
This switch becomes active when any of these sources is active. It remains active until all of the
sources are inactive.
NOTE:
There can be multiple sources for this switch. The switch is active if any
source is active. You have to make all of the sources inactive to make the
switch inactive.
When this switch becomes active, the generator sets are disconnected from the loads (Section
6.1.2 on page 87).
6.2
Utility Connected
The utility is connected if the utility main breaker is closed. The utility is not connected if the
utility main breaker is open.
If the utility main breaker is a dual-contact breaker and code 1455 (Utility Main Breaker Position
Contact) is active, the utility main breaker is considered closed, and the utility is connected.
Utility Current Based Breaker Position is not used in this determination.
6.2.1
Connecting the Utility

The utility is connected to the loads by sending a close signal to the utility main breaker. This
signal remains active until the utility is connected.
The utility cannot be connected if code 1454 (Generator Set Breaker Position Contact) is active.
6.2.2
Disconnecting the Utility

The utility is disconnected from the loads by sending an open signal to the utility main breaker.
This signal remains active until the utility is disconnected.
6.2.3

Utility Main Breaker Inhibit connection (TB10-11, TB10-13)
88
A029Y787 (Issue 1)
5-2012
Modbus networks
InPower
NOTE:
switch inactive.
When this switch becomes active, the utility is disconnected from the loads (Section 6.2.2 on
page 88).
6.3
Summary of Settings (PTC State)

TABLE 79.
SUMMARY OF SETTINGS (PTC STATE)
Setting
Description
Gen CB Inhibit Vol
Sets the generator set breaker inhibit.

Possible values: No Inhibit, Inhibit
Util CB Inhibit Vol
Sets the utility main breaker inhibit.

TABLE 80.
SUMMARY OF MONITOR POINTS (PTC STATE)
Setting
Description
PTC State
Indicates which sources are connected to the loads.

Possible values: Not Enabled, No Source Connected,
Utility Connected, Genset Connected, Paralleled
Gen CB Inhibit Sw
Indicates the state of the generator set breaker inhibit.
Util CB Inhibit Sw
Indicates the state of the utility main breaker inhibit.
A029Y787 (Issue 1)
89
5-2012
90
A029Y787 (Issue 1)
Power Transfer Control (PTC)

Operating Mode
PTC Operating Mode determines the PTC state to which the system is trying to get. For
example, if the utility is not available, the system tries to get the generator sets connected to the
loads.
7.1
PTC Logic and Source Availability

The power transfer control (PTC) logic will not connect an unavailable source to the loads.
NOTE:
7.2
If the topology is Isolated Bus Without Generator Set Main Breaker or

Isolated Bus with Generator Set Main Breaker, the utility is always
unavailable, so the PTC logic does not try to close the utility main breaker.
Priority of PTC Operating Modes

If the conditions for more than one PTC operating mode are met, the PTC operating mode with
the highest priority becomes active. The priorities of the PTC operating modes, from highest to
lowest, are as follows.
1. Utility Fail
2. Normal Override
3. Extended Parallel
4. Test
5. Normal
For example, if the conditions for extended parallel and the conditions for test are met at the
same time, the PTC operating mode is Extended Parallel.
7.3
Utility Fail
The utility is not available. The system tries to connect the generator sets to the loads.
7.3.1
Conditions for Entering Utility Fail

At least one of these conditions is met.
The utility is not available.
The utility source failure switch is active.
7.3.2
Utility Source Failure Switch

This switch is used by an external device that determines whether or not the utility is available.
If this switch is active, the utility is not available.
If there is no external device, this switch should be inactive.
A029Y787 (Issue 1)
91
7. Power Transfer Control (PTC) Operating Mode
5-2012
This switch is available in three-phase applications if the topology is Isolated Bus Without
Generator Set Main Breaker, Isolated Bus with Generator Set Main Breaker, Common Bus, or
Transfer Pair. It has no effect in other applications or topologies.
7.3.3
Conditions for Leaving Utility Fail

All of these conditions are met.
None of the conditions for entering utility fail are met.
The system is not committed to transferring the loads to the generator sets.
7.3.3.1 Commit to Transfer

This refers to the point in time at which the system commits to transferring the loads to the
generator sets even if the utility becomes available again.
7.3.3.2 Conditions Required for Commit to Transfer

This feature is not active unless all of the following conditions are met.
The topology is Common Bus or Transfer Pair.
The generator set breakers are ready to close. The generator set breaker inhibit is inactive,
and transfer inhibit is inactive. Code 1328 (Genset Main Breaker Tripped), code 1452
(Genset Main Breaker Fail to Close), and code 1454 (Genset Main Breaker Position
Contact) are not active.
7.3.3.3 Commit to Transfer Settings

This feature depends on Commit to Transfer Method.
No Commit: The system stops transferring the loads to the generator sets and returns to
the utility as soon as it is available. This setting should be used in applications that prefer
the utility to provide power to the loads as much as possible. However, the generator sets
can start and stop repeatedly if the utility is intermittent.
Utility Disconnect: The system is committed to transferring the loads to the generator sets
once the utility is disconnected. This setting is typical in applications with uninterruptible
power supplies (UPS) that require a guaranteed amount of generator set time to recharge
the batteries.
Genset Start: The system is committed to transferring the loads to the generator sets once
the generator sets are commanded to start. This setting reduces the likelihood of issues
such as wet stacking.
Once the loads are transferred to the generator sets, the loads will be powered by the generator
sets for at least Retransfer Delay (TDEN).
If the utility is available for Commit to Transfer Timer and the system has not transferred the
loads to the generator sets yet, the system returns to the utility as soon as possible.
7.4
Normal Override
The generator sets became unavailable while they were connected to the loads. The system
tries to connect the utility to the loads as quickly as possible. The system ignores retransfer time
delay and retransfer inhibit.
92
A029Y787 (Issue 1)
5-2012
7.4.1
Conditions for Entering Normal Override

The generator sets are not available.
PTC State is not Utility Connected.
7.4.2
Conditions for Leaving Normal Override

At least one of the conditions for entering normal override are not met.
7.5
Extended Parallel
This is a way to run the generator sets in parallel with the utility. When the generator sets run in
parallel with the utility, you can control the kW and kVAR of the generator sets or the utility.
7.5.1
Conditions for Entering Extended Parallel

Extended Parallel Enable is Enabled.
The extended parallel switch is active.
PTC State is not Not Connected.
Code 4137 (Advanced Grid Protection Fault) is not active.
7.5.2
Extended Parallel Switch

Extended Parallel Switch connection (TB2-4, TB2-6)
PCCNet devices
Modbus networks
InPower
Exercise scheduler
NOTE:
7.5.3
switch inactive.
Conditions for Leaving Extended Parallel

At least one of the conditions for entering extended parallel is not met.
A029Y787 (Issue 1)
93
7.6
5-2012
Test
You might run a test for a variety of reasons. In standby applications, you might want to verify
that the system is ready to respond to the loss of the utility. Alternatively, you might run a test to
exercise the generator sets. In prime power applications, this might be the way you start the
generator sets.
You can run a test with load or a test without load.
7.6.1
Conditions for Entering Test

If the topology is Common Bus or Extended Parallel, all of these conditions have to be met.
The test start switch is active.
PTC State is Utility Connected or Genset Connected.
Code 2648 (Remote I/O Comm Failure Warning) and code 4137 (Advanced Grid
Protection Fault) are not active.
If the topology is Isolated Bus Without Generator Set Main Breaker or Isolated Bus with
Generator Set Main Breaker, all of these conditions have to be met.
The test start switch is active.
Code 2648 (Remote I/O Comm Failure Warning) is not active.
7.6.2
Test Start Switch

Test Start Switch connection (TB2-1, TB2-6)
PCCNet devices
Modbus networks
InPower
Exercise scheduler
NOTE:
7.6.3
switch inactive.
Conditions for Leaving Test

If the topology is Common Bus or Extended Parallel, one of these conditions is met.
The test start switch is not active.
Code 4137 (Advanced Grid Protection Fault) is active.
Generator Set Main Breaker, the test start switch is not active.
94
A029Y787 (Issue 1)
5-2012
7.7
Normal
This is the typical operating state. The system tries to connect the utility to the loads and shuts
down the generator sets.
7.7.1
Conditions for Entering Normal

The system is not in any of the other PTC operating modes.
7.7.2
Conditions for Leaving Normal

The system is in one of the other PTC operating modes.
7.8
Summary of Settings (PTC Operating Mode)

TABLE 81.
SUMMARY OF SETTINGS (PTC OPERATING MODE)
Setting
Description
Utility Source Failure Vol
Sets the utility source failure switch.

Commit To Transfer Method
Specifies the point in time at which the system commits to

transferring the loads to the generator sets even if the
utility becomes available again.
Possible values: Utility Disconnect, Genset Start, No
Commit (Default: Utility Disconnect)
Commit To Transfer Timeout
Specifies how long the system waits for the generator

sets to connect to the loads once it is committed to
transferring the loads to the generator sets.
Possible values: 0-3200 seconds (Default: 120 seconds)
Breaker Commitment Time Delay
Specifies the amount of time the MCM3320 waits for the

breaker to respond to a command. If the breaker does not
respond to the command, the MCM3320 does not
necessarily generate a code, but the MCM3320 can
change the command if conditions have changed.
Extended Parallel Enable
Enables or disables extended parallel.

Possible values: Enabled, Disabled (Default: Disabled)
Extended Parallel Start Vol
Sets the extended parallel switch.

Possible values: Stop, Start
Test Start Vol
Sets the test start switch.

Possible values: Stop, Start
TABLE 82.
SUMMARY OF MONITOR POINTS (PTC OPERATING MODE)
Setting
Description
PTC Operating Mode
Indicates the current PTC operating mode.
Utility Source Failure Sw
Indicates the state of the utility source failure switch.
Commit To Transfer State
Indicates whether or not the system is committed to

transferring the loads to the generator sets.
A029Y787 (Issue 1)
95
5-2012
Setting
Description
Extended Parallel Start Sw
Indicates the state of the extended parallel switch.
Test Start Sw
Indicates the state of the test start switch.
96
A029Y787 (Issue 1)
Breaker Control
Breaker control decides which breakers should open and close and when each breaker action
should occur to support the PTC Operating Mode.
8.1
PTC Transfer Pair Operating Mode

PTC Transfer Pair Operating Mode determines how the breakers are controlled.
TABLE 83.
8.2
PTC TRANSFER PAIR OPERATING MODE
Mode of Operation
Manual
Manual
Auto
PTC Operating Mode
Breaker Control in Manual

See Section 15.6 on page 164.
8.3
Breaker Control in Utility Fail
Disconnect the utility according to Utility Breaker Opening Point.

If Utility Breaker Opening Point is Upon Utility Failure, disconnect the utility immediately.
If Utility Breaker Opening Point is After Transfer Delay, disconnect the utility after Transfer Delay (TDNE)
expires.
Connect the generator sets when the generator sets are available and Programmed Transition Delay (TDPT)
expires.
Disconnect the utility immediately.
FIGURE 68.
A029Y787 (Issue 1)
BREAKER CONTROL IN UTILITY FAIL

97
8. Breaker Control
8.4
5-2012
Breaker Control in Normal Override
Disconnect the generator sets immediately.
Connect the utility when Programmed Transition Delay (TDPT) expires.
FIGURE 69.
98
BREAKER CONTROL IN NORMAL OVERRIDE
A029Y787 (Issue 1)
5-2012
8.5
8. Breaker Control
Breaker Control in Extended Parallel
1. Retransfer Delay (TDEN) expires.

2. Synchronize the generator sets with the utility.
3. Connect the utility.
Nothing happens unless code 1999 (Maximum Parallel Time) and code 2397 (Utility Main Breaker Fail to Open)
are inactive.
If the topology is Common Bus, let the generator sets close their paralleling breakers when Transfer Delay
(TDNE) expires.
If the topology is Transfer Pair, follow these steps.
1. Transfer Delay (TDNE) expires.

3. Connect the generator sets.
FIGURE 70.
8.6
BREAKER CONTROL IN EXTENDED PARALLEL
Breaker Control in Test

Breaker control depends on Test With Load Cmd and PTC Operating Transition Type. There is
no breaker control in a test without load.
NOTE:
A029Y787 (Issue 1)

Isolated Bus with Generator Set Main Breaker, PTC Operating Transition
Type is always Open Transition.
99
8. Breaker Control
5-2012
Nothing happens unless code 1999 (Maximum Parallel Time) and code 2397 (Utility Main Breaker Fail to Open)
are inactive.
If the topology is Common Bus, let the generator sets close their paralleling breakers when Transfer Delay
(TDNE) expires.
If the topology is Transfer Pair, follow these steps.
1. Transfer Delay (TDNE) expires.

3. Connect the generator sets.
B
In a soft-closed transition, disconnect the utility when the utility is unloaded.

In a hard-closed transition, disconnect the utility immediately.
FIGURE 71.
100
BREAKER CONTROL IN TEST WITH LOAD (CLOSED TRANSITION)
A029Y787 (Issue 1)
5-2012
8. Breaker Control
Disconnect the utility after Transfer Delay (TDNE) expires.
Connect the generator sets when the generator sets are available and Programmed Transition Delay (TDPT)
expires.
FIGURE 72.
8.6.1
BREAKER CONTROL IN TEST WITH LOAD (OPEN TRANSITION)
Test with Load Command

Test With Load Cmd indicates whether the system is running a test with load or a test without
load. If a test is started by the exercise scheduler, Test With Load Cmd is based on the settings
in the schedule. If a test is not started by the exercise scheduler, Test With Load Cmd is based
on Test with Load Enable.
8.7
Breaker Control in Normal

Breaker control depends on the topology and PTC Operating Transition Type.
Generator Set Main Breaker, the system disconnects the generator sets immediately.
A029Y787 (Issue 1)
101
8. Breaker Control
5-2012
1. Retransfer Delay (TDEN) expires.

3. Connect the utility.
In a soft-closed transition, disconnect the generator sets when the generator sets are unloaded. If Maximum
Parallel Time (TDMP) expires, disconnect the generator sets immediately.
In a hard-closed transition, disconnect the generator sets immediately.
FIGURE 73.
102
BREAKER CONTROL IN NORMAL (CLOSED TRANSITION, COMMON BUS OR

TRANSFER PAIR TOPOLOGY)
A029Y787 (Issue 1)
5-2012
8. Breaker Control
Disconnect the generator sets when Retransfer Delay (TDEN) expires.
FIGURE 74.
8.7.1
BREAKER CONTROL IN NORMAL (OPEN TRANSITION, COMMON BUS OR TRANSFER

PAIR TOPOLOGY)
Open-transition Retransfer After Fail To Synchronize

If the generator sets are unable to synchronize with the utility during a closed-transition
retransfer in Normal mode, set Fail To Sync Open Transition Retransfer Enable to Enabled if
the system should execute an open-transition retransfer.
If Fail To Sync Open Transition Retransfer Enable is Enabled, the generator sets are
disconnected immediately when all of these conditions are met.
PTC Transfer Pair Operating Mode is Normal.
PTC State is Genset Connected.
Code 1457 (Fail to Synchronize Warning) is active.
Retransfer inhibit is inactive.
The rest of the retransfer is the same as an open-transition retransfer in Normal mode.
8.8
Timers
8.8.1
Transfer Time Delay

This gives the generator sets more time to stabilize before accepting loads. It also gives the
utility more time to recover before the loads are transferred to the generator sets.
NOTE:
Set this value to zero if the system has to meet NFPA 110 starting
requirements.
If the generator sets become unavailable, the timer resets.
A029Y787 (Issue 1)
103
8. Breaker Control
5-2012
This is also known as Time Delay Normal to Emergency (TDNE).
8.8.2
Retransfer Time Delay

This is the amount of time between the time the utility is available again and the time the loads
are transferred from the generator sets to the utility.
This gives the utility more time to stabilize before retransfer.
This is also known as Time Delay Emergency to Normal (TDEN).
8.8.3
Programmed Transition Time Delay

This allows residual voltage from inductive loads to decay to an acceptable level before the
transfer is completed.
This is also known as Time Delay Programmed Transition (TDPT).
8.8.4
Maximum Parallel Timer

This is the maximum amount of time the generator sets can be in parallel with the utility when
PTC Operating Mode is not Extended Parallel.
If the generator sets are in parallel with the utility for this amount of time, code 1999 (Maximum
Parallel Time) is active, and the generator sets are disconnected immediately.
This is also known as Time Delay Maximum Parallel (TDMP).
8.8.5
Summary of Settings (PTC Timers)

TABLE 84.
SUMMARY OF SETTINGS (PTC TIMERS)
Setting
Description
Transfer Delay (TDNE)
Sets the transfer time delay.

Retransfer Delay (TDEN)
Sets the retransfer time delay

Programmed Transition Delay (TDPT)
Sets the programmed-transition time delay.

Maximum Parallel Time (TDMP)
Sets the maximum parallel time delay.

8.9
Inhibits
8.9.1
Master Inhibit
Master Inhibit connection (TB3-8, TB3-17)
Modbus networks
InPower
104
A029Y787 (Issue 1)
5-2012
8. Breaker Control
NOTE:
switch inactive.
When this switch becomes active, the following features are disabled.
Breaker control when PTC State is No Source Connected, Genset Connected, or Utility
Connected.
Synchronizer
Load control in extended parallel
8.9.2
Transfer Inhibit
Transfer Inhibit connection (TB3-6, TB3-8)
Modbus networks
InPower
Code 1455 (Utility Main Breaker Position Contact) is active, and Utility Current Based
Breaker Position is Closed.
NOTE:
switch inactive.
When this switch is active, the following changes occur.

The Transfer Time Delay timer resets and stops running.
If PTC Transfer Pair Operating Mode is Utility Fail, the utility does not disconnect when
PTC State is Utility Connected if Utility Breaker Opening Point is After Transfer Delay.
If PTC Transfer Pair Operating Mode is Test, the MCM3320 does not try to connect or
disconnect sources when PTC State is No Source Connected or Utility Connected.
If PTC Transfer Pair Operating Mode is Extended Parallel, the MCM3320 does not try to
connect or disconnect sources when PTC State is Utility Connected.
8.9.3
Retransfer Inhibit
Retransfer Inhibit connection (TB3-7, TB3-8)
Modbus networks
InPower
Code 1454 (Genset Main Breaker Position Contact) is active, and Genset Current Based
Breaker Position is Closed.
A029Y787 (Issue 1)
105
8. Breaker Control
NOTE:
5-2012
switch inactive.
This switch has no effect unless the topology is Common Bus or Transfer Pair. When this switch
is active, the following changes occur.
The Retransfer Time Delay timer resets and stops running.
If PTC Transfer Pair Operating Mode is Normal, there is no breaker control when PTC
State is Genset Connected.
If PTC Transfer Pair Operating Mode is Extended Parallel, there is no breaker control
when PTC State is Genset Connected.
8.9.4
Override Switch
Override Switch connection (TB1-13, TB1-14)
Modbus networks
InPower
NOTE:
switch inactive.
This switch forces a transfer or retransfer to occur as quickly as possible. When this switch is
active, the following changes occur.
The Start Time Delay timer expires.
The Transfer Time Delay timer expires.
The Retransfer Time Delay timer expires.
Transfer inhibit from external sources is disabled. The transfer inhibit from current-based
breaker position is still enabled.
Retransfer inhibit from external sources is disabled. The retransfer inhibit from currentbased breaker position is still enabled.
8.9.5

Modbus networks
InPower
NOTE:
106
switch inactive.
A029Y787 (Issue 1)
5-2012
8. Breaker Control
6.1.2 on page 87).
8.9.6

Modbus networks
InPower
NOTE:
switch inactive.
page 88).
8.10
Fail to Disconnect Enable

If Fail to Disconnect Enable is Enabled, the system takes additional actions to try to disconnect
one of the sources when the generator sets are running in parallel with the utility.
If code 1453 (Genset Main Breaker Fail to Open) is active, the utility is disconnected
immediately.
If code 2397 (Utility Main Breaker Fail to Open) is active, the generator sets are
disconnected immediately.
In addition, code 1121 (Fail to Disconnect) is enabled.
8.11
Output Signals for Breakers

For the utility main breaker and generator set main breaker, the output signal remains active
until the breaker position matches the output signal. For example, if the MCM3320 sends a
close signal to the utility main breaker, the close signal remains active until the utility main
breaker closes. This allows for connecting to non-continuous duty-rated trip and close coils.
For the generator set paralleling breakers, the MCM3320 inhibits the breakers when the
generator sets are supposed to be disconnected. This should open the paralleling breakers
immediately. The MCM3320 releases the inhibit when the generator sets are supposed to be
connected, but the generator sets decide when the paralleling breakers actually close.
A029Y787 (Issue 1)
107
8. Breaker Control
8.12
5-2012
Summary of Settings (Breaker Control)

TABLE 85.
SUMMARY OF SETTINGS (BREAKER CONTROL)
Setting
Description
Gen CB Manual Control
Connects or disconnects the generator sets when PTC

Transfer Pair Operating Mode is Manual.
Possible values: Close Requested, No Command, Open
Commanded
Util CB Manual Control
Connects or disconnects the utility when PTC Transfer

Pair Operating Mode is Manual.
Possible values: Close Requested, No Command, Open
Commanded
Utility Breaker Opening Point
Specifies when the MCM3320 opens the utility main

breaker after the utility becomes unavailable. If this is
After Transfer Delay, the action can be prevented by a
transfer inhibit.
Possible values: After Transfer Delay, Upon Utility Failure
(Default: After Transfer Delay)
Genset Unloaded Level
Specifies the maximum load at which the generator sets

are considered unloaded. This is used in soft-closed
transitions.
Possible values: -32768~32767 kW (Default: 50 kW)
Utility Unloaded Level
Specifies the maximum load at which the utility is

considered unloaded. This is used in soft-closed
transitions.
Network Master Inhibit
Sets the master inhibit.

Transfer Inhibit Vol
Sets the transfer inhibit.

Retransfer Inhibit Vol
Sets the retransfer inhibit.

Override Vol
Sets the override switch.

Possible values: No Override, Override
Gen CB Inhibit Vol
Sets the generator set breaker inhibit.

Util CB Inhibit Vol
Sets the utility main breaker inhibit.

Fail To Disconnect Enable
Enables or disables the ability to take additional actions to

try to disconnect one of the sources when the generator
sets are running in parallel with the utility.
Possible values: Disable, Enable (Default: Enable)
Gen CB Open To Close Delay
Specifies the minimum amount of time the generator set

main breaker must remain open before the MCM3320 can
send a close signal. This is intended to prevent breaker
anti-pump lockout. This has no effect on the generator set
paralleling breakers.
Possible values: 0-1 second (Default: 0.1 seconds)
108
A029Y787 (Issue 1)
5-2012
8. Breaker Control
Setting
Description
Util CB Open To Close Delay
Specifies the minimum amount of time the utility main

breaker must remain open before the MCM3320 can send
a close signal. This is intended to prevent breaker antipump lockout.
Possible values: 0-1 second (Default: 0.1 seconds)
Gen CB Recharge Delay
Specifies the minimum amount of time between close

signals to the generator set main breaker. This is ignored
if the generator set main breaker does not close in
response to the first close signal. This gives the breaker
time to recharge. This has no effect on the generator set
paralleling breakers.
Util CB Recharge Delay
Specifies the minimum amount of time between close

signals to the utility main breaker. This is ignored if the
utility main breaker does not close in response to the first
close signal. This gives the breaker time to recharge.
TABLE 86.
SUMMARY OF MONITOR POINTS (BREAKER CONTROL)
Setting
Description
Indicates the current operating mode for breaker control.

This is the same as PTC Operating Mode, except that
PTC Transfer Pair Operating Mode can be Manual.
PTC Util Close Request
Indicates whether or not the PTC logic is requesting the

utility to connect to the loads.
Possible values: Active, Inactive
PTC Util Open Request

utility to disconnect from the loads.
PTC Gen Close Request

generator sets to connect to the loads.
PTC Gen Open Request

generator sets to disconnect from the loads.
PTC Breaker Control Request
Indicates what type of control the PTC logic wants after it

consolidates the PTC requests and considers Breaker
Commitment Time Delay.
Possible values: No Command, Close Utility, Open Utility,
Close Genset, Open Genset
PTC Breaker Control Command
Identical to PTC Breaker Control Request.
Util CB Close Command
Indicates whether or not the MCM3320 is sending a close

signal to the utility main breaker. This signal considers Util
CB Open To Close Delay and Util CB Recharge Delay.
Util CB Open Command
Indicates whether or not the MCM3320 is sending an

open signal to the utility main breaker. This signal
considers the utility main breaker inhibit and code 1121
(Fail to Disconnect).
A029Y787 (Issue 1)
109
8. Breaker Control
5-2012
Setting
Description
Gen CB Close Command
Indicates whether or not the MCM3320 is sending a close

signal to the generator set main breaker. This signal
considers Gen CB Open To Close Delay and Gen CB
Recharge Delay.
Gen CB Open Command
Indicates whether or not the MCM3320 is sending an

open signal to the generator set main breaker. This signal
considers the generator set breaker inhibit and code 1121
(Fail to Disconnect).
Virtual Gen Main Breaker Command
Indicates what type of control the MCM3320 wants on the

generator set paralleling breakers as a group. If the
topology is Isolated Bus with Generator Set Main Breaker
or Transfer Pair, this is always Close Breaker.
Possible values: Close Breaker, Open Breaker
Paralleling Gensets Breaker Inhibit Command
Indicates whether or not the MCM3320 is inhibiting the

generator set paralleling breakers. This signal considers
code 1121 (Fail to Disconnect).
Possible values: No Inhibit, Inhibit All Gensets
Master Inhibit
Indicates the status of the master inhibit.

Transfer Inhibit Sw
Indicates the status of the transfer inhibit.

Retransfer Inhibit Sw
Indicates the status of the retransfer inhibit.

Override Sw
Indicates the status of the override switch.

Possible values: No Override, Override
Gen CB Inhibit Sw
Indicates the status of the generator set breaker inhibit.

Util CB Inhibit Sw
Indicates the status of the utility main breaker inhibit.

110
A029Y787 (Issue 1)
Generator Set Control

Generator set control decides whether or not the generator sets should be running to support
the PTC Operating Mode. Generator set control provides a remote start signal to all of the
generator sets; it does not start or stop individual generator sets.
NOTE:
9.1
The generator sets should be in Auto mode.
PTC Generator Set Operating Mode

PTC Genset Operating Mode determines how the generator sets are controlled. It is identical to
PTC Operating Mode.
9.2
Generator Set Control in Utility Fail, Extended

Parallel, and Test
If the generator sets are not running when any of these operating modes are entered, the
generator sets are commanded to start after Start Time Delay expires.
The generator sets will not be stopped.
9.3
Generator Set Control in Normal Override

The generator sets will not be started.
If the generator sets are running when this operating mode is entered, the generator sets
continue to run until PTC State is Utility Connected. Then, the generator sets are commanded to
stop after Stop Time Delay.
9.4
Generator Set Control in Normal

The generator sets will not be started in this operating mode.
If the generator sets are running when this operating mode is entered, the resopnse depends on
the topology.
Generator Set Main Breaker, the generator sets are commanded to stop after Stop Time
Delay.
If the topology is Common Bus or Transfer Pair, the generator sets continue to run until
PTC State is Utility Connected. Then, the generator sets are commanded to stop after
Stop Time Delay.
9.5
Start Delay
This gives the utility more time to recover before the loads are transferred to the generator sets.
NOTE:
A029Y787 (Issue 1)
Set this value to zero if the system has to meet NFPA 110 starting
requirements.
111
9. Generator Set Control
NOTE:
9.6
5-2012
This is a different setting than the start delay in each generator set. The
generator sets will not start for the sum of both start delays. For example, the
start delay is 5 seconds, and the start delay in generator set A is 15 seconds.
Generator set A will not start for 20 seconds.
Stop Delay
This gives the generator sets more time to run at rated speed and voltage with no load.
NOTE:
9.7
This is a different setting than the stop delay in each generator set. The
generator sets will not stop for the sum of both stop delays. For example, the
stop delay is 5 seconds, and the stop delay in generator set A is 15 seconds.
Generator set A will run at rated speed and voltage for 20 seconds.
Summary of Settings (Generator Set Control)

TABLE 87.
SUMMARY OF SETTINGS (GENERATOR SET CONTROL)
Setting
Description
Start Time Delay (TDES)
Specifies the start delay for all of the generator sets. This
is a different setting than the one in each generator set.
Stop Time Delay (TDEC)
Specifies the stop delay for all of the generator sets. This
is a different setting than the one in each generator set.
Start Gensets Relay Active State
Specifies the active state of the relay that is connected to

the generator set remote start input.
Possible values: Active Energized, Active Deenergized
(Default: Active Energized)
TABLE 88.
SUMMARY OF MONITOR POINTS (GENERATOR SET CONTROL)
Setting
Description
PTC Genset Operating Mode
Indicates the current operating mode for generator set

control. This is the same as PTC Operating Mode.
Genset Run Request
Indicates whether or not the MCM3320 wants to run the

generator sets before the MCM3320 considers the time
delays. When this setting becomes Run, Start Time Delay
(TDES) begins. When this setting becomes Stop, Stop
Time Delay (TDEC) begins. This is not the setting that
controls the remote start signal to the generator sets.
Possible values: Stop, Run
Genset Run Command
Indicates whether or not the MCM3320 is sending a

remote start signal to the generator sets.
Possible values: Stop, Run
112
A029Y787 (Issue 1)
10
Load Control
Load control drives the kW Master Load Control and the kVAR Master Load Control outputs.
These outputs are used to adjusts the real power and the reactive power provided by the
generator sets when the generator sets are running in parallel with the utility. They are also
used to tell the generator sets to ramp up their loads and to ramp down their loads during softclosed transitions.
10.1
Associated Pins
TABLE 89.
Pin
10.2
ASSOCIATED PINS
Description
TB9-1
kW load setpoint
TB9-2
Analog input return
TB9-3
kVAR load setpoint
TB9-4
kW master load control
TB9-5
kVAR master load control
TB9-6
Analog output return
Extended Parallel
This is a way to run the generator sets in parallel with the utility. When the generator sets run in
parallel with the utility, you can control the kW and kVAR of the generator sets or the utility.
10.2.1 Conditions for Load Control in Extended Parallel

Load control is active when all of these conditions are met.
PTC Operating Mode is Extended Parallel.
Code 1121 (Fail to Disconnect) is inactive.
10.2.1.1 Master Inhibit

Modbus networks
InPower
NOTE:
A029Y787 (Issue 1)
switch inactive.
113
10. Load Control
5-2012
Connected.
Synchronizer
10.2.2 kW Control
When the generator sets run in parallel with the utility, you can control the real power (kW) of
the generator set bus or the utility.
If the real power of the generator set bus is fixed, this is called base load. The utility handles the
variation in the loads.
If the real power of the utility is fixed, this is called peak shave. The generator sets handle the
variation in the loads until the load on the generator sets exceeds the capacity of the generator
sets.
10.2.2.1 Generator Set Bus Percent Level

With this method, the available generator sets run at a fixed percentage of their rated outputs.
You specify the percentage. If a generator set is not available, the remaining generator sets do
not provide more power to compensate. The utility provides the rest of the power required by
the loads.
No.
Description
kW Real power
t
Time
FIGURE 75.
114
No.
Description
Generator set output
Load
GENERATOR SET BUS PERCENT LEVEL
A029Y787 (Issue 1)
5-2012
10. Load Control
10.2.2.2 Generator Set Bus kW

With this method, the available generator sets provide a fixed amount of real power. You specify
the amount. If a generator set is not available, the remaining generator sets provide more power
to compensate as long as there is enough capacity. The utility provides the rest of the power
required by the loads.
No.
Description
kW Real power
t
Time
FIGURE 76.
No.
Description
Load
GENERATOR SET BUS KW
10.2.2.3 Generator Set Bus kW with Utility Constraint

With this method, the generator sets provide a fixed amount of real power as long as the utility
provides a minimum amount of real power. If the utility starts providing less power than this
minimum amount, this method reduces the amount of power the generator sets provide. You
specify the amount of real power provided by the generator sets, and you specify the minimum
amount of real power provided by the utility.
If you set the minimum amount of real power provided by the utility to a positive value or zero,
this prevents the generator sets from providing power to the utility.
If you set the minimum amount of real power provided by the utility to a negative value, this
allows the generator sets to export power to the utility if the load is less than the amount of real
power provided by the generator sets. For example, if the utility is supposed to provide -500 kW,
the generator sets may export up to 500 kW of power to the utility.
A029Y787 (Issue 1)
115
10. Load Control
No.
5-2012
Description
kW Real power
t
Time
FIGURE 77.
Description
kW Real power
Time
FIGURE 78.
Description
Load
GENERATOR SET BUS KW WITH UTILITY CONSTRAINT (MINIMUM AMOUNT OF REAL

POWER PROVIDED BY UTILITY IS POSITIVE)
No.
No.
No.
Description
Load
GENERATOR SET BUS KW WITH UTILITY CONSTRAINT (MINIMUM AMOUNT OF REAL

POWER PROVIDED BY UTILITY IS NEGATIVE)
10.2.2.4 Utility Bus kW

With this control, the utility provides a fixed amount of real power. You specify the amount. The
generator sets provide the rest of the power required by the loads.
116
A029Y787 (Issue 1)
5-2012
10. Load Control
No.
Description
No.
kW Real power
t
Time
FIGURE 79.
Description
Load
UTILITY BUS KW
10.2.2.5 kW Setpoint Source

The desired kW load for the generator sets or the utility can be set externally by the kW Load
Setpoint input or internally by certain settings. Use the appropriate setting to control the source.
TABLE 90.
APPROPRIATE SETTING FOR KW SETPOINT SOURCE BASED ON KW LOAD

CONTROL TYPE
Extended Paralleling kW Load Control Type
Appropriate Setting
Genset Bus % Level (Open Loop)

Genset Bus kW (Closed Loop)
Genset Bus kW w/Utility Constraint (Closed Loop)
Genset Bus kW Setpoint Source
Utility Bus kW (Closed Loop)
Utility Bus kW Setpoint Source
10.2.3 kVAR Control

When the generator sets run in parallel with the utility, you can control the reactive power (kVAR
or power factor) of the generator set bus or the utility. This control is independent of kW control.
For example, you can run the generator sets in base load while maintaining the power factor of
the utility to avoid penalties due to low power factor.
10.2.3.1 Generator Set Support for kVAR Control

The PCC 3100 supports the Generator Set Controllers method. It does not support any other
kVAR control method.
The PCC 3200, PCC 3201, and PowerCommand 3.3 support all kVAR control methods.
A029Y787 (Issue 1)
117
10. Load Control
5-2012
10.2.3.2 Summary of kVAR Control Methods

The kVAR control methods vary in two ways.
The system target
Whether or not an alarm is generated if the system is off-target for too long
TABLE 91.
SUMMARY OF KVAR CONTROL METHODS
Method
System Target
Alarm?
None
No
Generator Set Bus Percent Level
Generator set bus kVAR
No
Generator Set Bus Power Factor
Generator bus power factor
No
Generator set bus kVAR
Yes
Generator set bus power factor
Yes
Utility kVAR
Yes
Utility power factor
Yes
Generator Set Controllers
Generator Set Bus kVAR

Generator Set Bus Power Factor
Utility Bus kVAR
Utility Bus Power Factor
Additional notes about the kVAR control methods:

With the Generator Set Controllers method, each generator set controls its reactive power.
With the Generator Set Bus Percent Level method, you do not specify a kVAR target. The
available generator sets run at a fixed percentage of their rated outputs. You specify the
percentage. If a generator set is not available, the remaining generator sets do not provide
more power to compensate.
10.2.3.3 kVAR Setpoint Source

The desired kVAR load or power factor for the generator sets or the utility can be set externally
by the kVAR Load Setpoint input or internally by certain settings. Use the appropriate setting to
control the source.
TABLE 92.
APPROPRIATE SETTING FOR KVAR SETPOINT SOURCE BASED ON KVAR LOAD

CONTROL TYPE
Extended Paralleling kVAR Load Control Type
Appropriate Setting
Genset Controllers
Not applicable
Genset Bus % Level (Open Loop)

Genset Bus Power Factor (Open Loop)
Genset Bus kVAR (Closed Loop)
Genset Bus Power Factor (Closed Loop)
Genset Bus kVAR Setpoint Source
Utility Bus kVAR (Closed Loop)

Utility Bus Power Factor (Closed Loop)
Utility Bus kVAR Setpoint Source
10.2.4 Extended Parallel Ramp Load Time

If the previous PTC State was Utility Connected, load control ramps up the generator sets from
zero to the desired load during Extended Parallel Ramp Load Time. If the desired load changes
during Extended Parallel Ramp Load Time, it is possible for the ramp to finish early or late.
118
A029Y787 (Issue 1)
5-2012
10. Load Control
If the previous PTC State was Genset Connected, load control tells the generator sets to run at
the desired load immediately.
10.2.5 Open-loop Methods and Closed-loop Methods

With closed-loop methods, the MCM3320 sends a signal to the generator sets, measures the
output of the generator sets, and uses a proportional-integral (PI) loop to adjust the signal to the
generator sets to drive the output to the desired value. With open-loop methods, the MCM3320
sends a signal to the generator sets but does not monitor the output of the generator sets.
10.2.5.1 Proportional-integral (PI) Loop

A proportional-integral (PI) loop is one way to drive a measured value to a desired value.
A PI loop uses the difference between the measured value and the desired value to calculate
how much to drive the measured value. This calculation is based on several settings.
KP (proportional): This setting considers the current difference between the measured
value and the desired value. The greater the difference, the harder this setting drives the
measured value. KP is also the overall gain.
If this value is too low, it can take a long time for the measured value to reach the desired
value. If this value is too high, the PI loop drives the measured value too hard, and the
measured value becomes unstable.
KI (integral): This setting looks at the historical differences betwen the measured value and
the desired value. It considers both the magnitude of the differences and the duration of
the difference. The longer the difference is consistently higher or consistently lower than
the desired value, the harder this setting drives the measured value. Conversely, if the
measured value is oscillating around the desired value, this setting has less impact.
value, or the measured value may stabilize at an offset from the desired value. If this value
is too high, the measured value can become unstable.
KA: This setting controls the impact of KI when it is added to KP. The higher this setting, the
greater the impact of KI and the greater the impact of KI relative to KP.
KSAT: This setting limits the impact of KI when the desired value is being ramped up. During
ramp-up, the PI loop drives the measured value at a slower rate in order to minimize the
disturbance on the system. The higher this setting, the less impact KI has during ramp-up.
NOTE:
PI loops are usually tuned appropriately for the system in which they are
used. If the system is not responding appropriately, however, make small
adjustments one setting at a time, and observe the impact on the system
after each change. Large changes or changes to several settings usually
cause a response that is undesirable, unpredictable, and unstable.
10.2.5.2 Adaptive Proportional Gain

An adaptive proportional gain increases Kp at a specified rate if the error is above the adaptive
gain error threshold. This may be used in situations in which a higher gain is required to achieve
the same response at higher errors. For example, load control operates independently of the
number of generator sets that are online. If significantly fewer generator sets are online than is
typical, the error will be higher, and a higher gain is required to drive the available generator
sets to the desired load in the same amount of time.
A029Y787 (Issue 1)
119
10. Load Control
No.
5-2012
Description
No.
Description
Kpa Adaptive proportional gain
Error
Kp Proportional gain (not adaptive)
Adaptive gain error threshold
Adaptive gain slope
FIGURE 80.
ADAPTIVE PROPORTIONAL GAIN
10.2.6 Load Ramping During Extended Parallel

At the beginning of extended parallel, the MCM3320 controls the ramp up of the loads on the
generator sets. At the end of extended parallel, the generator sets control the ramp down of
their loads.
If a new generator set connects after the other generator sets started running in parallel with the
utility, the generator set controls the ramp up of its load. With closed-loop methods, the
MCM3320 begins to adjust its output to compensate for the new generator set. In order to
minimize the impact of the new generator set on the closed-loop method, the ramp load time
should be at least 60 seconds. Similarly, in case a generator set shuts down with cooldown
during extended parallel, the ramp unload time should be at least 60 seconds.
120
A029Y787 (Issue 1)
5-2012
10. Load Control
10.2.7 Summary of Settings (kW Load Control)

TABLE 93.
SUMMARY OF SETTINGS (KW LOAD CONTROL)
Setting
Description
Extended Paralleling kW Load Control Type
Specifies the kW load control method.

Possible values: Genset Bus % Level (Open Loop),
Genset Bus kW (Closed Loop), Genset Bus kW w/Utility
Constraint (Closed Loop), Utility Bus kW (Closed Loop)
(Default: Genset Bus % Level (Open Loop))
Genset Bus kW Setpoint Source
If Extended Paralleling kW Load Control Type is Genset

Bus % Level (Open Loop), Genset Bus kW (Closed
Loop), or Genset Bus kW w/Utility Constraint (Closed
Loop), this specifies how the desired kW load for the
generator sets is specified.
This has no effect for other values of Extended Paralleling
kW Load Control Type.
Possible values: Internal, Analog Input (Default: Internal)
Utility Bus kW Setpoint Source
If Extended Paralleling kW Load Control Type is Utility

Bus kW (Closed Loop), this specifies how the desired kW
load for the utility is specified.
Genset Bus %kW Setpoint
This has no effect if Genset Bus kW Setpoint Source is

Analog Input.
Bus % Level (Open Loop), this specifies the percentage
of rated load at which the generator sets should run.
Possible values: -5~105% (Default: 80%)
Genset Bus kW Setpoint

Analog Input.
Bus kW (Closed Loop) or Genset Bus kW w/Utility
Constraint (Closed Loop), this specifies the amount of
real power the generator sets should provide.
Utility Bus kW Constraint Level

Analog Input.
Bus kW w/Utility Constraint (Closed Loop), this specifies
the minimum amount of real power the utility should
provide regardless of the load on the generator sets. If
this value is negative, the generator sets may export
power to the utility.
A029Y787 (Issue 1)
121
10. Load Control
5-2012
Setting
Description
Utility Bus kW Setpoint
This has no effect if Utility Bus kW Setpoint Source is

Analog Input.
If Extended Paralleling kW Load Control Type is Utility
Bus kW (Closed Loop), this specifies the amount of real
power the utility should provide.
kW Load Control Maximum %Output

Bus % Level (Open Loop), this specifies the maximum
output level for kW load control. For other values of
Extended Paralleling kW Load Control Type, the
maximum output level for kW load control is limited to this
value + 5%.
Extended Parallel Ramp Load Time
Specifies the amount of time load control ramps up the

generator sets to the desired load.
kW Adaptive Gain Error Threshold
Specifies the error, calculated as a percentage of Total

System Capacity, above which adaptive proportional gain
starts increasing Kp.
kW Adaptive Gain Slope
Specifies the rate at which Kp increases per 1% error

above kW Adaptive Gain Error Threshold.
Possible values: 0-50 / 1%-error (Default: 0.1 / 1%-error)
kW Ka, Ki, Kp, Ksat
Specifies the gains of the kW load control proportionalintegral (PI) loop. kW Kp Adaptive, not kW Kp, is used in
the PI loop.
Possible values: 12-17 (Default: 15)
TABLE 94.
SUMMARY OF MONITOR POINTS (KW LOAD CONTROL)
Setting
Description
kW Load Target
Indicates the amount of real power the generator sets or

the utility should provide. The calculation is based on
Extended Paralleling kW Load Control Type and kW
setpoint source.
kW Reference Control State
Indicates the current state of kW load control. If the

previous PTC State was not Utility Connected, this is
Track Target.
Possible values: Off, Ramp Load, Track Target
kW Load Reference
Indicates the amount of real power the generator sets or

the utility should provide after adjusting for the ramp up of
the generator sets during Extended Parallel Ramp Load
Time.
122
A029Y787 (Issue 1)
5-2012
10. Load Control
Setting
Description
kW Kp Adaptive

Bus kW (Closed Loop), Genset Bus kW w/Utility
Constraint (Closed Loop), or Utility Bus kW (Closed
Loop), this indicates the value of Kp calculated by
adaptive proportional gain. This value is used in the PI
loop. For other values of Extended Paralleling kW Load
Control Type, the PI loop is not used, and this is Kp.
kW Load Control Output
Indicates the output of kW load control. The unit of

measure is a percentage for pulse-width modulation.
kW Master Load Control Command
Indicates how much load control is driving the kW master

load control output. The unit of measure is a percentage
for pulse-width modulation. If kW load control is inactive,
this is set by load ramp.
10.2.8 Summary of Settings (kVAR Load Control)

TABLE 95.
SUMMARY OF SETTINGS (KVAR LOAD CONTROL)
Setting
Description
Extended Paralleling kVAR Load Control Type
Specifies the kVAR load control method.

Possible values: Genset Controllers, Genset Bus % Level
(Open Loop), Genset Bus Power Factor (Open Loop),
Genset Bus kVAR (Closed Loop), Genset Bus Power
Factor (Closed Loop), Utility Bus kVAR (Closed Loop),
Utility Bus Power Factor (Closed Loop) (Default: Genset
Controllers)
Genset Bus kVAR Setpoint Source
If Extended Paralleling kVAR Load Control Type is

Genset Bus % Level (Open Loop), Genset Bus Power
Factor (Open Loop), Genset Bus kVAR (Closed Loop), or
Genset Bus Power Factor (Closed Loop), this specifies
how the desired kVAR load for the generator sets is
specified.
kVAR Load Control Type.
Utility Bus kVAR Setpoint Source
If Extended Paralleling kVAR Load Control Type is Utility

Bus kVAR (Closed Loop) or Utility Bus Power Factor
(Closed Loop), this specifies how the desired kVAR load
for the utility is specified.
Genset Bus %kVAR Setpoint
This has no effect if Genset Bus kVAR Setpoint Source is

Analog Input.
Genset Bus % Level (Open Loop), this specifies the
percentage of rated load at which the generator sets
should run.
A029Y787 (Issue 1)
123
10. Load Control
5-2012
Setting
Description
Genset Bus kVAR Setpoint

Analog Input.
Genset Bus kVAR (Closed Loop), this specifies the
amount of reactive power the generator sets should
provide.
Genset Bus Power Factor Setpoint

Analog Input.
Genset Bus Power Factor (Open Loop) or Genset Bus
Power Factor (Closed Loop), this specifies the power
factor at which the generator sets should run.
Possible values: 0.7-1.0 (Default: 1.0)
Utility Bus kVAR Setpoint
This has no effect if Utility Bus kVAR Setpoint Source is

Analog Input.
Bus kVAR (Closed Loop), this specifies the amount of
reactive power the utility should provide.
Possible values: -32768~32767 kVAR (Default: 100
kVAR)
Utility Bus Power Factor Setpoint
This has no effect if Utility Bus kVAR Setpoint Source is

Analog Input.
Bus Power Factor (Closed Loop), this specifies the power
factor at which the utility should run.
Possible values: 0.7-1.0 (Default: 1.0)
kVAR Load Control Maximum %Output

Genset Bus % Level (Open Loop), this specifies the
maximum output level for kVAR load control. If Extended
Paralleling kVAR Load Control Type is Genset Bus kVAR
(Closed Loop), Genset Bus Power Factor (Closed Loop),
Utility Bus kVAR (Closed Loop), or Utility Bus Power
Factor (Closed Loop), the maximum output level for kW
load control is limited to this value + 5%. For other values
of Extended Paralleling kVAR Load Control Type, this has
no effect.
Extended Parallel Ramp Load Time
Specifies the amount of time load control ramps up the

generator sets to the desired load.
kVAR Adaptive Gain Error Threshold
Specifies the error, calculated as a percentage of Total

System Capacity, above which adaptive proportional gain
starts increasing Kp.
kVAR Adaptive Gain Slope
Specifies the rate at which Kp increases per 1% error

above kVAR Adaptive Gain Error Threshold.
Possible values: 0-50 / 1%-error (Default: 0.1 / 1%-error)
124
A029Y787 (Issue 1)
5-2012
10. Load Control
Setting
Description
kVAR Ka, Ki, Kp, Ksat
Specifies the gains of the kVAR load control proportionalintegral (PI) loop. kVAR Kp Adaptive, not kVAR Kp, is
used in the PI loop.
TABLE 96.
SUMMARY OF MONITOR POINTS (KVAR LOAD CONTROL)
Setting
Description
kVAR Load Target

Genset Bus % Level (Open Loop), Genset Bus kVAR
Factor (Closed Loop), this indicates the amount of
reactive power the generator sets or the utility should
provide. The calculation is based on Extended Paralleling
kVAR Load Control Type and kVAR setpoint source.
Power factor is converted to kVAR based on a power
factor of 0.8 at rated load. For other values of Extended
Paralleling kVAR Load Control Type, this is zero.
kVAR Reference Control State

Factor (Closed Loop), this indicates the current state of
kVAR load control. If the previous PTC State was not
Utility Connected and for other values of Extended
Paralleling kVAR Load Control Type, this is Track Target.
Possible values: Off, Ramp Load, Track Target
kVAR Load Reference

Factor (Closed Loop), this indicates the amount of
reactive power the generator sets or the utility should
provide after adjusting for the ramp up of the generator
sets during Extended Parallel Ramp Load Time. For other
values of Extended Paralleling kVAR Load Control Type,
this is zero.
kVAR Kp Adaptive

Genset Bus kVAR (Closed Loop), Genset Bus Power
Factor (Closed Loop), Utility Bus kVAR (Closed Loop), or
Utility Bus Power Factor (Closed Loop), this indicates the
value of Kp calculated by adaptive proportional gain. This
value is used in the PI loop. For other values of Extended
Paralleling kVAR Load Control Type, the PI loop is not
used, and this is Kp.
kVAR Load Control Output
Indicates the output of kVAR load control. The unit of

measure is a percentage for pulse-width modulation.
kVAR Master Load Control Command
Indicates how much load control is driving the kVAR

master load control output. The unit of measure is a
percentage for pulse-width modulation. If kVAR load
control is inactive, this is set by load ramp.
A029Y787 (Issue 1)
125
10. Load Control
10.3
5-2012
Soft-closed Transition
A soft-closed transition is a make-before-break transfer of a load from one source to another.
When the second source is connected in parallel to the first, the load on the first source is
gradually reduced until it falls below a particular threshold, at which point the first source is
disconnected.
There will be no power interruption. Both sources have to be in parallel for this type of transfer.
10.3.1 Load Control During Soft-closed Transitions

During a soft-closed transition transfer from the utility to the generator sets, load control tells the
generator sets to ramp up their loads. During a soft-closed transition retransfer from the
generator sets to the utility, load control tells the generator sets to ramp down their loads.
The generator sets control the rate at which the loads are ramped.
If code 1121 (Fail to Disconnect) is active, load control tells the generator sets to ramp down
their loads.
10.4
Load Control at Other Times

When PTC State is not Paralleled, load control still sends signals to the generator sets. The
generator sets may not respond to these signals depending on the generator set control and its
configuration.
When PTC State is not Paralleled, load control tells the generator sets to ramp up their loads if
these conditions are met.
PTC State is Utility Connected.
Otherwise, load control tells the generator sets to ramp down their loads.
10.5
Load Control Output Enable by Hardware Version

If multiple MCM3320s are interconnected for load control, only one MCM3320 should drive the
load share lines at a time. The mechanism to make sure this happens depends on Hardware
Version.
If Hardware Version is 1 or 2, the output signals for load control are active when load control is
active. If multiple MCM3320s are interconnected for load control, map code 1534 (Load Control
Output Event) to a configurable output, and connect this output to a relay through which the
output signals are routed.
If Hardware Version is 3 or 4, the output signals are active if any of these conditions is met.
The master inhibit is inactive.
If neither of these conditions is met, load control is active, but the output signals for load control
are inactive.
126
A029Y787 (Issue 1)
5-2012
10. Load Control
10.5.1 Code 1534 - Load Control Output Event

This is active if any of these conditions is met.
A029Y787 (Issue 1)
127
10. Load Control
5-2012
128
A029Y787 (Issue 1)
11
Synchronizer
The synchronizer adjusts the generator set voltage, frequency, and phase to match the utility
voltage, frequency, and phase. This is required before the generator sets can run in parallel with
the utility.
The synchronizer is responsible for synchronization of the generator sets as a group before the
utility main breaker or the generator set main breaker can close. The synchronizer has no effect
on the synchronization done by each generator set control before its paralleling breaker can
close.
If the topology is Common Bus, each generator set synchronizes itself with the utility when
the system executes a closed-transition transfer at the beginning of a test with load. The
synchronizer is responsible for synchronization of the generator sets with the utility when
the system executes a closed-transition retransfer at the end of a test with load.
If the topology is Transfer Pair, each generator set synchronizes itself with the other
generator sets before it closes its paralleling breaker. The synchronizer is responsible for
synchronization of the generator sets as a group with the utility before the generator sets
run in parallel with the utility.
The synchronizer is inactive if the topology is Isolated Bus Without Generator Set Main Breaker
or Isolated Bus with Generator Set Main Breaker.
11.1
Synchronizer Status
Synchronizer Status indicates whether or not the synchronizer is running.
The synchronizer runs if all of these conditions are met.
Breaker control requires synchronization.
11.1.1 Fail to Synchronize Lockout Enable

If Fail to Sync Lockout Enable is Enable, the synchronizer is not allowed to run when code 1457
(Fail to Synchronize Warning) is active. If Fail to Sync Lockout Enable is Disable, the
synchronizer continues trying to synchronize the generator sets with the utility.
11.1.2 Master Inhibit

Modbus networks
InPower
A029Y787 (Issue 1)
129
11. Synchronizer
NOTE:
5-2012
switch inactive.
Connected.
Synchronizer
11.2
Frequency Matching
The synchronizer uses a single PI (proportional-integral) loop to calculate Master Frequency
Bias Command, which drives the generator sets on the kW load share lines.
The initial value of Master Frequency Bias Command is the current value on the kW load share
lines. This makes sure that there is a minimal transient when the synchronizer starts. The
synchronizer raises Master Frequency Bias Command linearly from the initial value to the output
of the PI loop during Frequency Match Ramp Rate.
The target frequency is limited to a range of Frequency Match Lower Range Limit to Frequency
Match Upper Range Limit, relative to System Frequency.
Set Synchronize Method to select the method for frequency matching.
11.2.1 Phase Match

Phase match tries to drive the phase difference between the generator sets and the utility to
zero.
In some applications, a phase shift between the generator sets and the utility exists at the
MCM3320, for example, if there is a delta/wye transformer. In these applications, Sync Phase
Offset should be set to account for this phase shift.
11.2.2 Slip Frequency

Slip frequency tries to drive a fixed frequency difference (Slip Frequency) between the generator
sets and the utility. This method is often selected in one of these situations.
It is important that power flows in the desired direction when the generator sets are first
connected in parallel.
The generator sets cannot be controlled well enough to make the generator set phase
match the utility phase, for example, with gas fuel systems.
11.2.3 Proportional-integral (PI) Loop

130
A029Y787 (Issue 1)
5-2012
11. Synchronizer
NOTE:
11.3
Voltage Match
Voltage match tries to drive the voltage difference between the generator sets and the utility to
zero.
The synchronizer uses a single PI (proportional-integral) loop to calculate Master Voltage Bias
Command, which drives the generator sets on the kVAR load share lines.
The initial value of Master Voltage Bias Command is the current value on the kW load share
lines. This makes sure that there is a minimal transient when the synchronizer starts. The
synchronizer raises Master Voltage Bias Command linearly from the initial value to the output of
the PI loop during Voltage Match Ramp Rate.
The target voltage is limited to a range of Voltage Match Lower Range Limit to Voltage Match
Upper Range Limit, relative to 100% of nominal voltage.
11.3.1 Voltage Match Test Offset

Voltage Match Test Offset allows field testing of the voltage match. When this value is set, it is
added to the measured utility voltage before the error is calculated. For example, if Voltage
Match Test Offset is +5% and the utility is running at 98% of nominal voltage, the synchronizer
tries to drive the generator sets to 103% of nominal voltage. The result is still limited by Voltage
Match Lower Range Limit and Voltage Match Upper Range Limit.
This setting is temporary; it lasts for 30 seconds. After that, the setting returns to 0%.
This setting may come from any of these sources:
PCCNet networks
InPower
A029Y787 (Issue 1)
131
11. Synchronizer
5-2012
11.3.2 kVAR Load Share Protection and Voltage Match Fail

In some cases, the synchronizer is unable to match the generator set voltage to the utility
voltage. For example, the generator sets are overloaded, and the utility voltage is higher than
nominal voltage. The V/Hz curves inside the generator set controllers are reducing voltage in
response to the overload at the same time the synchronizer is trying to increase voltage to
match the utility voltage. As a result, the output on the kVAR load share lines saturates,
effectively disabling kVAR load sharing. When kVAR load sharing is disabled, one or more
generator sets likely start importing kVAR, ultimately resulting in all of the generator sets
shutting down.
To avoid this scenario, the synchronizer monitors the difference between the generator set
voltage and the utility voltage. If the difference remains above 0.5% for at least 6 seconds, the
synchronizer disables voltage matching. Voltage matching remains disabled until the sources
synchronize anyway or until the synchronizer turns off.
Voltage Match Fail tracks the status of this protection. If it is true, voltage matching is disabled
until the next time the synchronizer turns on.
11.3.3 Proportional-integral (PI) Loop

NOTE:
132
A029Y787 (Issue 1)
5-2012
11.4
11. Synchronizer
Synchronizer Check Close Allowed

Sync Check Close Allowed indicates whether or not the system is ready to connect one of the
sources to the loads.
11.4.1 Permissive Close Allowed

Permissive Close Allowed indicates whether or not the two sources are synchronized with each
other.
Permissive Close Allowed becomes Allowed when all of these conditions are met.
The voltage, frequency, and phase are synchronized for Permissive Window Time.
The difference between the generator set voltage and the utility voltage is less than
Permissive Voltage Window. (If the difference is negative, remove the negative sign
before comparing it.)
The difference between the generator set frequency and the utility frequency is less
than Permissive Frequency Window. (If the difference is negative, remove the
negative sign before comparing it.)
The phase difference between the generator sets and the utility is less than
Permissive Phase Window. (If the difference is negative, remove the negative sign
before comparing it.)
At the end of Permissive Window Time, the phase difference between the generator sets
and the utility is less than 10 degrees, or it is decreasing.(If the difference is negative,
remove the negative sign before comparing it.)
Permissive Close Allowed remains Allowed as long as one of these conditions is met.
The voltage, frequency, and phase remain synchronized.
The difference between generator set voltage and utility voltage is less than or equal to
5%, and the phase difference between the generator sets and the utility is less than or
equal to 20 degrees. (If either difference is negative, remove the negative sign before
comparing it.)
One of the breakers has been commanded to close, and the associated fail to close fault is
not active.
Otherwise, Permissive Close Allowed becomes Not Allowed.
11.5
Summary of Settings (Synchronizer)

TABLE 97.
SUMMARY OF SETTINGS (SYNCHRONIZER)
Setting
Description
Synchronize Method
Specifies the frequency matching method.

Possible values: Phase Match, Slip Frequency (Default:
Phase Match)
Slip Frequency
Specifies the fixed frequency difference the synchronizer

tries to drive between the generator sets and the utility
when Synchronize Method is Slip Frequency.
Possible values: -3~3 Hz (Default: 0.1 Hz)
A029Y787 (Issue 1)
133
11. Synchronizer
5-2012
Setting
Description
Sync Phase Offset
Specifies the fixed phase difference the synchronizer tries

to drive between the generator sets and the utility when
Synchronize Method is Phase Match.
Possible values: -50~50 degrees (Default: 0 degrees)
Frequency Match Ka, Ki, Kp, Ksat
Specifies the gains of the frequency-matching

proportional-integral (PI) loop.
Possible values (Ka): 12-17 (Default: 15)
Possible values (Ki): 0-255 (Default: 20)
Possible values (Kp): 1-300 (Default: 30)
Possible values (Ksat): 1000-65000 (Default: 16384)
Frequency Match Ramp Rate
Specifies the amount of time the synchronizer ramps up

Master Frequency Bias Command when the synchronizer
turns on.
Possible values: 0-60 seconds (Default: 1 second)
Voltage Match Ka, Ki, Kp, Ksat
Specifies the gains of the voltage-matching proportionalintegral (PI) loop.

Possible values (Ka): 12-17 (Default: 15)
Possible values (Ki): 0-255 (Default: 50)
Possible values (Kp): 10-800 (Default: 400)
Possible values (Ksat): 1000-65000 (Default: 16384)
Voltage Match Ramp Rate
Specifies the amount of time the synchronizer ramps up

Master Voltage Bias Command when the synchronizer
turns on.
Voltage Match Test Offset
Specifies a temporary adjustment to the voltage match

error. This resets to 0% after 30 seconds.
Permissive Frequency Window
Specifies the maximum difference in frequency allowed

for synchronization.
Possible values: 0.001-1 Hz (Default: 1 Hz)
Permissive Phase Window
Specifies the maximum difference in phase allowed for

synchronization.
Possible values: 0.1-20 degrees (Default: 10 degrees)
Permissive Voltage Window
Specifies the maximum difference in voltage allowed for

synchronization.
Possible values: 0.5-10% (Default: 5%)
Permissive Window Time
Specifies how long the frequency, phase, and voltage

must remain within the limits allowed for synchronization
before the synchronizer allows the generator sets to run
in parallel with the utility.
Possible values: 0.5-5 seconds (Default: 0.5 seconds)
Network Master Inhibit
Sets the master inhibit

Fail to Sync Lockout Enable
Enables or disables the stopping of the synchronizer

when code 1457 (Fail to Synchronize Warning) is active.
Possible values: Disable, Enable (Default: Disable)
Fail To Synchronize Time
Specifies how long the synchronizer tries to synchronize

the generator sets with the utility before code 1457 (Fail
to Synchronize Warning) becomes active. This is also the
time delay for code 1456 (Synchronizer Output Limit) and
code 1458 (Synchronizer Phase Rotation Mismatch).
134
A029Y787 (Issue 1)
5-2012
11. Synchronizer
TABLE 98.
SUMMARY OF MONITOR POINTS (SYNCHRONIZER)
Setting
Description
Synchronizer Status
Indicates whether or not the synchronizer is running.
Single Phase Synchronizer status
Indicates whether or not the single-phase synchronizer is

running.
Dead Bus Close Allowed
Indicates whether or not the conditions for closing to a

dead bus are met.
Frequency Matched
Indicates whether or not the difference in frequency

between the generator sets and the utility is less than
Permissive Frequency Window. This reflects the current
status; it does not consider Permissive Window Time.
Phase Matched
Indicates whether or not the difference in phase between

the generator sets and the utility is less than Permissive
Phase Window. This reflects the current status; it does
not consider Permissive Window Time.
Voltage Matched
Indicates whether or not the difference in voltage between

the generator sets and the utility is less than Permissive
Voltage Window. This reflects the current status; it does
not consider Permissive Window Time.
Time In Window
Indicates how long the frequency, phase, and voltage

have been within the limits allowed by the synchronizer.
Permissive Close Allowed
Indicates whether or not the conditions for closing to a

dead bus are met.
Sync Check Close Allowed
Indicates whether or not the synchronizer allows an

available source to connect to the loads.
Master Frequency Bias Command
Indicates how much the synchronizer is driving the kW

load share lines. The unit of measure is a percentage for
pulse-width modulation.
Master Voltage Bias Command
Indicates how much the synchronizer is driving the kVAR

load share lines. The unit of measure is a percentage for
pulse-width modulation..
Master Inhibit
Indicates the state of the master inhibit.
A029Y787 (Issue 1)
135
11. Synchronizer
5-2012
136
A029Y787 (Issue 1)
12
Load Add/Shed
12.1
Load Add/Shed Enable

This feature is active if all of these conditions are met.
Load Add Shed Enable is Enabled.
The topology is Isolated Bus Without Generator Set Main Breaker, Isolated Bus with
Generator Set Main Breaker, Common Bus, or Transfer Pair.
The MCM can communicate with at least one SID module.
12.2
Loads by SID
NOTE:
SIDs are connected to loads, not load-add levels or load-shed levels.

TABLE 99.
LOADS BY SID
SID
Loads
SID0
1-6
SID1
7-10
SID2
11-14
SID3
15-18
12.2.1 Unavailable SID and Load Add/Shed

Load add/shed remains active as long as there is contact with at least one SID. If a SID or its
AUX 102 becomes unavailable, load add/shed operates the same way, but the loads that are
connected to the unavailable SID or AUX 102 may not actually be added or removed when
commanded.
12.3
Load-add Levels
Each load is assigned to a specific load-add level. Two or more loads can be assigned to the
same load-add level. It is possible for a load-add level to have no loads assigned to it.
12.4
Load-shed Levels
Each load is assigned to a specific load-shed level. Two or more loads can be assigned to the
same load-shed level. It is possible for a load-shed level to have no loads assigned to it.
12.5
Load Add and the Generator Set Main Breaker

The generator set main breaker closes when the capacity of the available generator sets is at
least Generator Set Online Capacity Sensor Threshold.
A029Y787 (Issue 1)
137
12. Load Add/Shed
5-2012
Load add controls which loads are connected to the load bus. Load add does not control the
generator set main breaker, and the position of the generator set main breaker has no effect on
load add.
NOTE:
It is possible for the generator set main breaker to be open as loads are
connected to the load bus. If this happens, the loads will not get any power
from the generator sets until the generator set main breaker is closed.
This is expected behavior. If you plan to add loads manually, wait until the generator set main
breaker is closed before you start adding loads.
12.6
Load Add Shed Operating State

This setting indicates the current state of load add/shed.
TABLE 100.
LOAD ADD SHED OPERATING STATE
State
Off
none
Gen Source Auto Load Add
automatic load add
Gen Source Auto Load Shed
automatic load shed
Manual Load Add Restore

Utility Source Auto Load Add
12.7
Activity
manual load add/shed

utility load add
Automatic Load Add

This is the ability to add loads gradually as generator sets become available. As a result, some
loads can get power before all of the generator sets are available. In addition, if a generator set
does not become available, some loads still get power.
1. When the first generator set closes its paralleling breaker, the loads assigned to load-add
level 1 are connected.
2. When the second generator set closes its paralleling breaker, the loads assigned to loadadd level 2 are connected.
3. When the third generator set closes its paralleling breaker, the loads assigned to load-add
This continues until all of the generator sets close their paralleling breakers.
If there are more load-add levels than generator sets, the loads assigned to the remaining loadadd levels are added one load-add level at a time on a timed basis.
If one or more generator sets do not become available, the loads assigned to the remaining
load-add levels are not added.
If automatic load add is interrupted, for example, because the generator sets become
overloaded, the remaining loads have to be added manually.
138
A029Y787 (Issue 1)
5-2012
12. Load Add/Shed
12.7.1 Required Online Capacity

This is the amount of generator set capacity at which the loads assigned to the remaining loadadd levels are added one load-add level at a time on a timed basis whether or not the remaining
generator sets close their paralleling breakers.
For example, there are four generator sets. Each generator set can provide 1000 kW. Required
online capacity is 2000 kW, and the load-add delay is 5 seconds.
2. When the second generator set closes its paralleling breaker, the loads assigned to loadadd level 2 are connected. In addition, the load-add delay timer starts.
3. Five seconds later, the third generator set has not closed its paralleling breaker, but the
loads assigned to load-add level 3 are connected immediately. The load-add delay timer
resets.
4. Five seconds later, the fourth generator set has not closed its paralleling breaker, but the
loads assigned to load-add level 4 are connected immediately.
If there are more load-add levels than generator sets, the loads assigned to the remaining loadadd levels are added one load-add level at a time every 5 seconds. At this point, it does not
matter if the remaining generator sets close their paralleling breakers.
If a generator set closes its paralleling breaker before the load-add delay timer expires, the
loads assigned to the corresponding load-add level are connected immediately, ignoring the
timer. The timer continues, however. When the timer expires, the loads assigned to the next
load-add level are connected. In the example above, suppose the third generator set closes its
paralleling breaker two seconds after the second generator set closes its paralleling breaker.
2. When the second generator set closes its paralleling breaker, the loads assigned to loadadd level 2 are connected. In addition, the load-add delay timer starts.
3. Two seconds later, the third generator set closes its paralleling breaker. The loads
assigned to load-add level 3 are connected immediately. The load-add delay timer
continues.
4. Three seconds later, the fourth generator set has not closed its paralleling breaker, but the
loads assigned to load-add level 4 are connected immediately.
12.7.2 Conditions for Automatic Load Add

Automatic load add starts when all of the following conditions are met.
Load add/shed control (Auto/Manual Load Add Restore Mode) is Auto.
The utility is disconnected.
The first generator set is connected to the loads.*
* - Automatic load add starts when the generator set actually connects to the loads. The
transition from disconnected to connected is the condition for starting automatic load add.
Automatic load add ends when one of the following conditions is met.
All of the loads have been added.
A029Y787 (Issue 1)
139
12. Load Add/Shed
5-2012
If one or more loads has not been added, for example, because a generator set did not
come online, automatic load add remains active.
Load add/shed control (Auto/Manual Load Add Restore Mode) is Manual.
The generator sets become overloaded.
The generator sets are no longer available.
12.7.3 Automatic Load Add and Legacy SID Override

NOTE:
Legacy SID Override should be used only in existing installations where the
generator set paralleling breakers are connected in parallel. It should not be
used in new systems.
If Legacy SID Override is Enable, automatic load add works based on the pins, not the
paralleling breakers. If there are two paralleling breakers connected to the same set of pins, the
MCM waits for either of them to close before it adds the loads assigned to the next load addlevel. When the second paralleling breaker closes or if it never closes, it has no effect on
automatic load add.
Since there are four sets of pins, the MCM can add the loads assigned to four load-add levels
this way. Then, the loads assigned to the remaining load-add levels are added one load-add
level at a time on a timed basis.
12.8
Automatic Load Shed

This is the ability to remove lower-priority loads if the generator sets are overloaded. Higherpriority loads still get power. Without it, the system shuts down if the generator sets are
overloaded.
1. If the generator sets are overloaded, the loads assigned to load-shed level 1 are removed.
2. If the generator sets are still overloaded, the loads assigned to load-shed level 2 are
removed.
3. If the generator sets are still overloaded, the loads assigned to load-shed level 3 are
removed.
This continues until all of the loads are removed. If the generator sets are still overloaded, the
system shuts down.
NOTE:
Load-shed level 0 cannot be removed.
Any loads that are removed have to be added manually while the generator sets are running.
12.8.1 Conditions for Automatic Load Shed

Automatic load shed starts when the generator sets become overloaded.
Automatic load shed ends when one of the following conditions is met.
All of the loads have been removed.
The generator sets are no longer overloaded.
140
A029Y787 (Issue 1)
5-2012
12. Load Add/Shed
12.8.2 Automatic Load Shed During Open-transition Transfers

If load add/shed is active, all of the loads are removed during an open-transition transfer from
the utility to the generator sets if PTC Operating Mode is Test or Utility Fail.
12.8.3 Open Transition Retransfer Load Shed

This protects loads that cannot handle open transitions or the change in phase that occurs
afterwards.
If Open Transition Retransfer Load Shed Enable is Enabled, all of the loads are removed during
an open-transition retransfer from the generator sets to the utility. The loads are added by loadadd level on a timed basis once the utility is connected.
If Open Transition Retransfer Load Shed Enable is Disabled, the loads remain connected during
the open transition.
This setting has no effect if load add/shed is not active.
12.9
Conditions for Manual Load Add/Shed

Manual load add/shed starts when all of the following conditions are met.
Load add/shed control (Auto/Manual Load Add Restore Mode) is Manual.
PTC State is Genset Connected.
Manual load add/shed ends when one of the following conditions is met.
Load add/shed control (Auto/Manual Load Add Restore Mode) is Auto.
The generator sets become overloaded.
The generator sets are no longer available.
The topology is Common Bus or Transfer Pair, and PTC Operating Mode is Normal.
12.10 Utility Load Add

This is the ability to add loads gradually if some loads are not connected when the loads are
connected to the utility. For example, this might happen if the generator sets overloaded or if
some loads were not added because one or more generator sets did not come online.
NOTE:
This works with breakers. It does not work with automatic transfer switches
(ATS) because ATS handle the retransfer by themselves.
The loads assigned to each remaining load-add level are added one load-add level at a time on
a timed basis. Regardless of which loads might already be connected, this feature starts with
load-add level 1.
12.10.1 Conditions for Utility Load Add

Utility load add starts when all of the following conditions are met.
One or more load-add levels have not been added yet.
The topology is Common Bus or Transfer Pair.
The utility is connected to the loads.*
A029Y787 (Issue 1)
141
12. Load Add/Shed
5-2012
* - Utility load add starts when the utility connects to the loads. The transition from disconnected
to connected is the condition for starting utility load add.
Utility load add ends when one of the following conditions is met.
All of the loads have been added.
The utility is no longer connected to the loads.
The utility is no longer available.
12.11 Maximum Number of Loads by Firmware Version

The maximum number of loads is also the maximum number of load-add levels and load-shed
levels.
TABLE 101.
MAXIMUM NUMBER OF LOADS BY FIRMWARE VERSION
Firmware Version
Maximum Number of Loads
before V2.01
2.01 or later
18
12.12 Output Signals for Feeder Breakers

This table describes the output signals sent to feeder breakers for load add/shed.
TABLE 102.
Signal
OUTPUT SIGNALS FOR FEEDER BREAKERS

Description
Add load
Wait for 0.25 seconds, active for 2 seconds
Shed load
Active as long as the load is supposed to be removed
Restore load
Active for 1 second
12.13 Output Signals for Automatic Transfer Switches

(ATS)
This table describes the output signals sent to ATSs for load add/shed.
TABLE 103.
OUTPUT SIGNALS FOR AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCHES (ATS)

Signal
Add load
Active as long as the load is supposed to be connected
Shed load
Active as long as the load is supposed to be removed and

the generator sets are connected to the loads
Restore load
142
Description
Active for 1 second
A029Y787 (Issue 1)
5-2012
12. Load Add/Shed
12.14 Summary of Settings (Load Add/Share)

TABLE 104.
SUMMARY OF SETTINGS (LOAD ADD/SHARE)
Setting
Description
Load Add Shed Enable
Enables or disables load add/shed.

Default: Disabled
Open Transition Retransfer Load Shed Enable
Enables or disables the shedding of all loads during an

open-transition retransfer.
Default: Disabled
Load N Device Type
Indicates the type of load.

Possible values: None, Breaker, ATS
Load N Add Level
Indicates to which load-add level load N is assigned.

Possible values: 1-18
Load N Shed Level
Indicates to which load-shed level load N is assigned.

Possible values: 0-17
Genset Bus Load Add Delay
Indicates how frequently to add load-add levels when

Load Add Shed Required Online Capacity is online or
when all of the generator sets are online.
Load Add Shed Required Online Capacity
Indicates how much generator set capacity must be

online before loads should be added on a timed basis.
Set this to 0 to disable this.
Default value: 0 kW
Utility Bus Load Add Delay
Indicates how frequently to add load-add levels when the

loads are retransferred to the utility.
Load Shed Delay
Indicates how frequently to remove load-shed levels when

the generator sets are overloaded.
A029Y787 (Issue 1)
143
12. Load Add/Shed
5-2012
144
A029Y787 (Issue 1)
13
Load Demand
Load demand is the ability to shut down and restart generator sets automatically to let the
remaining generator sets operate closer to their rated capacity. This decreases fuel
consumption and reduces wear on the generator sets.
NOTE:
13.1
Two or more generator sets must be available for this feature to work.
Load Demand Enable

Load Demand Enable is Enabled.
Load Demand Type is Fixed Sequence or Run Hours.
The topology is Isolated Bus Without Generator Set Main Breaker, Isolated Bus with
Generator Set Main Breaker, Common Bus, or Transfer Pair.
The generator sets are available and connected to the loads.
The MCM can communicate with all of the required SID modules.
Code 1444 (Genset Bus Overload) is inactive.
Code 1335 (AC Metering Out of Range) is inactive.
If load demand becomes inactive, it restarts any generator sets that have been shut down due
to load demand.
13.2
Generator Sets by SID

TABLE 105.
GENERATOR SETS BY SID
SID
Generator Sets
none
1-4
SID1
5-8
SID2
9-12
SID3
13-16
13.2.1 Unavailable SID and Load Demand

If a SID or AUX 102 becomes unavailable, load demand becomes inactive.
13.3
Generator Set Support for Load Demand in

Extended Parallel
The PCC 3100, PCC 3200, and PCC 3201 do not support load demand while the generator set
is running in extended parallel. These controls support load demand in other situations.
The PowerCommand 3.3 supports load demand in every situation.
A029Y787 (Issue 1)
145
13. Load Demand
13.4
5-2012
Initial Time Delay

This is the amount of time between the time the first generator set closes its paralleling breaker
and the time load demand becomes active.
This value should allow time for the remaining generator sets to start, ramp up to rated speed
and voltage, and close their paralleling breakers. It should also allow time for the loads to be
connected and to stabilize, if necessary.
13.5
When a Generator Set Is Shut Down
13.5.1 Shutdown Percentage

This value is a percentage of kW capacity of the available generator sets if a generator set is
shut down. If the load is under this percentage, that generator set will be shut down.
For example, there are four generator sets A, B, C, and D. Each generator set can provide 1000
kW.
Initially, all of the generator sets are available. The kW capacity of the available generator
sets is 4000 kW.
If a generator set is shut down, the kW capacity of the available generator sets would be
3000 kW.
The shutdown percentage applies to 3000 kW, not 4000 kW. If the shutdown percentage is
60%, the generator set shuts down if the load becomes less than 1800 kW (60% * 3000 kW).
13.5.2 Shutdown Threshold

This value is the amount of extra kW capacity the available generator sets should have if a
generator set is shut down.
kW.
Initially, all of the generator sets are available. The kW capacity of the available generator
sets is 4000 kW.
If a generator set is shut down, the kW capacity of the available generator sets would be
3000 kW.
If the shutdown threshold is 1100 kW, the generator set is shut down if the load becomes less
than 1900 kW (3000 kW - 1100 kW).
13.5.3 Shutdown Percentage or Shutdown Threshold

Shutdown threshold tends to run the generator sets more efficiently when there is a larger
number of generator sets.
For example, there are eight generator sets. Each generator set can provide 1000 kW.
Compare the loads at which each generator set shuts down using shutdown percentage (60%)
and using shutdown threshold (1200 kW).
146
A029Y787 (Issue 1)
5-2012
13. Load Demand
TABLE 106.
EXAMPLE: SHUTDOWN PERCENTAGE VS. SHUTDOWN THRESHOLD
#Generator Sets Online
60%
1200 kW
4200 kW
5800 kW
3600 kW
4800 kW
3000 kW
3800 kW
2400 kW
2800 kW
1800 kW
1800 kW
1200 kW
800 kW
600 kW
--
Using shutdown percentage, the first generator set does not shut down until the load is less
than 4200 kW, which leaves up to 3800 kW of extra capacity. This is a lot of extra capacity
unless the load is really volatile. In contrast, using shutdown threshold, the first generator set
shuts down when the load is less than 5800 kW.
If there are fewer generator sets in the system, however, shutdown percentage runs the
generator sets more efficiently. Consider the loads at which a generator set shuts down when
there are three generator sets online. Using shutdown percentage, a generator set shuts down
when the load is less than 1200 kW; using shutdown threshold, 800 kW. Furthermore, if there
are two generator sets online, another generator set does not shut down using shutdown
threshold in this example.
13.5.4 Shutdown Delay

This is the amount of time the load must remain low enough before a generator set is shut
down.
One generator set is shut down at a time. If the load is very low, this delay is the amount of time
before it shuts down each generator set.
13.5.5 Minimum Online Capacity

This is the amount of capacity that must be available, regardless of the load. A generator set will
not shut down if the capacity would be less than this value.
NOTE:
13.6
This is a different setting than Required Online Capacity. Required Online

Capacity is related to load add/shed. Minimum Online Capacity prevents a
generator set from shutting down if load demand is active.
When a Generator Set Is Restarted
13.6.1 Restart Percentage

This value is a percentage of kW capacity of the available generator sets. If the load is over this
percentage, a generator set is restarted.
kW. The restart percentage is 90%. Generator sets C and D have shut down due to load
demand. Generator sets A and B are available. The kW capacity of the available generator sets
is 2000 kW. If the load is over 1800 kW, a generator set is restarted.
A029Y787 (Issue 1)
147
13. Load Demand
5-2012
13.6.2 Relationship Between Shutdown Percentage and Restart

Percentage
If the restart percentage is too close to the shutdown percentage, a generator set might shut
down, restart, and repeat this cycle forever.
For example, there are four generator sets. Each generator set can provide 1000 kW.
Load demand is enabled.
The shutdown percentage is 75%.
The restart percentage is 80%.
The load varies between 2200 kW and 2420 kW.
1. All of the generator sets are available. The kW capacity of the available generator sets if a
generator shuts down is 3000 kW. A generator set shuts down when the load falls below
2250 kW (75% * 3000 kW).
2. A generator set has shut down. Three generator sets are available. The kW capacity of the
available generator sets is 3000 kW. The generator set restarts when the load rises above
2400 kW (80% * 3000 kW).
The process repeats as long as the load keeps varying.
There is no rule that can prevent this situation from occurring in every application. The likelihood
that this situation occurs depends on several factors: the number of generator sets in the
system, the kW capacity of each generator set, the load demand sequence, the expected loads,
the variability in the loads, and the difference between the restart percentage and the shutdown
percentage.
NOTE:
To reduce the likelihood of turning a generator set on and off repeatedly, set
the restart percentage at least 20% higher than the shutdown percentage. For
example, if shutdown percentage is 70%, the restart percentage should be at
least 90%.
If this situation does occur in your application, consider these changes.

Increase the difference between the restart percentage and the shutdown percentage.
If the generator sets have different kW capacities, change the load demand sequence.
If the load changes frequently, increase the Shutdown Delay.
13.6.3 Restart Threshold

This value is the minimum amount of extra kW capacity the available generator sets should
have at all times. If the load reduces the extra kW capacity below this value, a generator set
restarts.
kW. The restart threshold is 400 kW. Generator sets C and D have shut down due to load
demand. Generator sets A and B are available. The kW capacity of the available generator sets
is 2000 kW. If the load is over 1600 kW, a generator set restarts.
148
A029Y787 (Issue 1)
5-2012
13. Load Demand
13.6.4 Relationship Between Shutdown Threshold and Restart

Threshold
If the restart threshold is too close to the shutdown percentage, a generator set might shut
down, restart, and repeat this cycle forever.
For example, there are eight generator sets. Each generator set can provide 1000 kW.
Load demand is enabled.
The shutdown threshold is 600 kW.
The restart threshold is 400 kW.
The load varies between 6200 kW and 6820 kW.
1. All of the generator sets are available. The kW capacity of the available generator sets if a
generator is shut down is 7000 kW. A generator set shuts down when the load falls below
6400 kW (7000 kW - 600 kW).
2. A generator set has shut down. Seven generator sets are available. The kW capacity of the
available generator sets is 7000 kW. The generator set restarts when the load rises above
6600 kW (7000 kW - 400 kW).
The process repeats as long as the load keeps varying.
There is no rule that can prevent this situation from occurring in every application. The likelihood
that this situation occurs depends on several factors: the number of generator sets in the
system, the kW capacity of each generator set, the load demand sequence, the expected loads,
the variability in the loads, and the difference between the restart threshold and the shutdown
threshold.
NOTE:
To reduce the likelihood of turning a generator set on and off repeatedly, set
the shutdown threshold at least 50% of the rated capacity of a generator set
higher than the restart threshold. For example, if the restart threshold is 400
kW and each generator set can provide 1000 kW, the shutdown threshold
should be at least 900 kW.
If this situation does occur in your application, consider these changes.

Increase the difference between the restart threshold and the shutdown threshold.
If the generator sets have different kW capacities, change the load demand sequence.
If the load changes frequently, increase the Shutdown Delay.
13.6.5 Restart Delay

This is the amount of time the load must remain high enough before a generator set restarts.
This can be used when there are loads that have a high inrush startup at startup, for example,
chillers and pump motors. This delay helps prevent a generator set from restarting
unnecessarily.
NOTE:
A029Y787 (Issue 1)
This also increases the risk of overloading the generator sets because this is
a delay before a generator set restarts.
149
13. Load Demand
13.7
5-2012
Which Generator Set Shuts Down or Restarts
13.7.1 Fixed Sequence Method

With the fixed sequence method, the generator sets shut down in a specific order.
For example, there are four generator sets A, B, C, and D. A is the lead generator set, and you
set the order to (A, B, C, D). If a generator set shuts down, generator set D shuts down first. If
another generator set shuts down, generator C shuts down next.
NOTE:
The lead generator set will not shut down.
The generator sets restart in the reverse order in which they are shut down.
In the previous example, generator sets C and D have shut down. If a generator set restarts, it
will be generator set C.
13.7.2 Example: Fixed Sequence Method

There are four generator sets A, B, C, and D. The generator sets have the following rated
capacities.
TABLE 107.
EXAMPLE: RATED CAPACITIES OF EACH GENERATOR SET
Generator Set
Rated Capacity
600 kW
1000 kW
1200 kW
1500 kW
The kW capacity of the available generator sets is 4300 kW (600 kW + 1000 kW + 1200 kW +
1500 kW).
Load demand is using the fixed sequence method. A is the lead generator set, and the order is
(A, B, C, D).
The shutdown percentage is 60%.
1. All of the generator sets are available. Generator set D is the first generator set that would
shut down. The kW capacity of the available generator sets if generator set D shuts down
is 2800 kW (600 kW + 1000 kW + 1200 kW). If the load is under 1680 kW (2800 kW *
60%), generator set D shuts down.
2. Generator sets A, B, and C are available. Generator set C is the next generator set that
would shut down. The kW capacity of the available generator sets if generator set C shuts
down is 1600 kW (600 kW + 1000 kW). If the load is under 960 kW (1600 kW * 60%),
generator set C shuts down.
3. Generator sets A and B are available. Generator set B is the next generator set that would
shut down. The kW capacity of the available generator sets if generator set B shuts down
is 600 kW. If the load is under 360 kW (600 kW * 60%), generator set B shuts down.
Generator set A will not shut down because generator set A is the lead generator set.
150
A029Y787 (Issue 1)
5-2012
13. Load Demand
13.7.3 Setting a Fixed Sequence in InPower

The fixed sequence is stored in Load Demand GenA, Load Demand GenB, Load Demand
GenC, and so on, where Load Demand GenA is the lead generator set.
Each position in the sequence must have a unique value. If you change the generator set that is
assigned to a specific position in the sequence, the MCM automatically moves the original
generator set in that position to the original position of the new generator set. For example, the
fixed sequence is (Gen1, Gen2, Gen4, Gen3).
TABLE 108.
EXAMPLE: INITIAL FIXED SEQUENCE
Setting
Generator Set
Load Demand GenA
Gen1
Load Demand GenB
Gen2
Load Demand GenC
Gen4
Load Demand GenD
Gen3
Then, Load Demand GenA is set to Gen3.

TABLE 109.
EXAMPLE: FIXED SEQUENCE AFTER GEN4 IS ASSIGNED TO LOAD DEMAND GENA

Setting
Generator Set
Load Demand GenA
Gen3
Load Demand GenB
Gen2
Load Demand GenC
Gen4
Load Demand GenD
Gen1
Gen1 is automatically assigned to Load Demand GenD.
13.7.4 Run Hours Method

With this method, load demand balances the run hours of the generator sets.
The initial sequence is based on the current run hours of the generator sets. The generator set
with the fewest run hours is the lead generator set. The lead generator set will not shut down.
The generator set with the most run hours is the first generator set that shuts down.
As the generator sets run, the sequence changes to balance the run hours of the generator
sets. You specify a threshold. If the difference in run hours between two generator sets is
greater than the threshold, the two generator sets change places in the sequence. If necessary,
the generator set with the lower number of run hours restarts, and the generator set with the
higher number of run hours shuts down. The lead generator set can change in this method.
13.7.5 Source of Run Hours for the Run Hours Method

This method is based on the run hours that are maintained by the MCM3320, not the run hours
that are maintained by the generator sets. You can change the run hours of the generator sets
in the MCM3320. If you change the run hours of the generator sets in the MCM3320, the
sequence will change as necessary. If the sequence changes, generator sets will restart and
shut down accordingly.
A029Y787 (Issue 1)
151
13. Load Demand
NOTE:
5-2012
If you change the run hours of the generator sets in the MCM3320, generator
sets may restart and shut down immediately.
13.7.6 Example: Run Hours Method

There are four generator sets A, B, C, and D. The current sequence is (A, B, C, D). Generator
sets C and D have shut down because there is extra capacity. The generator sets have the
following run hours.
TABLE 110.
SEQUENCE BEFORE SWITCH 1
Sequence
Run Hours
40
35
25
20
The threshold is 20 run-hours. Generator set A and generator set D change places in the
current sequence. Generator set D restarts, and generator set A shuts down.
TABLE 111.
SEQUENCE AFTER SWITCH 1
Sequence
Run Hours
20
35
25
40
Generator sets D and B run for 10 hours.

TABLE 112.
SEQUENCE BEFORE SWITCH 2
Sequence
Run Hours
30 (20 + 10)
45 (35 + 10)
25
40
Generator set B and generator set C change places in the current sequence. Generator set C
restarts, and generator set B shuts down.
TABLE 113.
152
SEQUENCE AFTER SWITCH 2
Sequence
Run Hours
30
25
45
A029Y787 (Issue 1)
5-2012
13. Load Demand
Sequence
Run Hours
40
Generator sets D and C run for 5 hours. Then, all of the generator sets shut down.
The next time a generator set shuts down for load demand, generator set A will shut down.
13.7.7 Generator Set Online Time

GenX Online Time, where X identifies the generator set, tracks the amount of time the
paralleling breaker of the generator set is closed. This value can be set manually.
NOTE:
GenX Online Time is different than the number of run-hours tracked by each
generator set. The values may not be equal.
This value is used by the run hours method in load demand.
13.7.8 Generator Set Fail Time

This is the amount of time a generator set has to close its paralleling breaker after it is
commanded to start. At the end of this time, if the generator set has not closed its paralleling
breaker, the generator set is considered unavailable.
In load demand, this delay applies when a generator set is restarted. At the end of this time, if
the generator set has not closed its paralleling breaker, the next generator set is restarted.
If you set this value too low, a generator set might restart unnecessarily. If you set this value too
high, the system responds more slowly if a generator set does not restart.
13.8
Load Demand and Generator Set Overload

If one or more generator sets is shut down, the available generator sets can be overloaded
more easily. If this happens,
The generator sets that were shut down restart immediately.
Loads are removed based on load-shed levels. This uses the same load shed sequence
that automatic load shed (Section 12.8 on page 140) uses. It does not matter if automatic
load shed is active.
13.9
Summary of Settings (Load Demand)

TABLE 114.
SUMMARY OF SETTINGS (LOAD DEMAND)
Setting
Description
Load Demand Enable
Enables or disables load demand.

Default: Disabled
Load Demand Minimum Online Capacity
Specifies the amount of capacity that must be available,

regardless of the load. Set this to 0 to disable this.
Default: 0 kW
Load Demand Type
Specifies the way the sequence is generated.

Possible values: None, Fixed Sequence, Run Hours
(Default: None)
A029Y787 (Issue 1)
153
13. Load Demand
5-2012
Setting
Description
Load Demand GenX (X = A, B, C, ...)
Specifies the fixed sequence, where A is the lead

generator set. This has no effect unless Load Demand
Type is Fixed Sequence.
Possible values: Gen1, Gen2, Gen3, ....
Load Demand Run Hours Differential
If the difference in run hours between two generator sets

is greater than this value, the two generator sets change
places in the sequence. This has no effect unless Load
Demand Type is Run Hours.
Possible values: 1-500 hours (Default: 50 hours)
GenX Online Time (X = 1-16)
Specifies the run hours of the generator set.

Possible values: 0-1193046 hours
Load Demand Refresh Sequence Command
Forces the current sequence to be recalculated, based on

Load Demand Type, the same way it is calculated initially
when load demand becomes active. This has no effect
unless Load Demand Type is Run Hours.
Possible values: Do Nothing, Refresh Sequence
Load Demand Initial Delay
Specifies the amount of time between the time the first

generator set closes its paralleling breaker and the time
load demand becomes active.
Possible values: 1-60 minutes (Default: 5 minutes)
Load Demand Restart Delay
Specifies the amount of time the load must remain high

enough before a generator set restarts.
Load Demand Shutdown Delay
Specifies the amount of time the load must remain low

enough before a generator set is shut down.
Genset Fail Time Delay
Specifies the amount of time a generator set has to close

its paralleling breaker after it is commanded to start.
Load Demand Threshold Method
Specifies the way the load thresholds for the next

shutdown and the next restart are calculated.
Possible values: %kW, kW (Default: %kW)
Load Demand Shutdown Percent
Specifies a percentage of kW capacity of the available

generator sets if a generator set is shut down. If the load
is under this percentage, that generator set will be shut
down. This has no effect unless Load Demand Threshold
Method is %kW.
Load Demand Restart Percent
Specifies a percentage of kW capacity of the available

generator sets. If the load is over this percentage, a
generator set is restarted. This has no effect unless Load
Demand Threshold Method is %kW.
Load Demand Shutdown kW Threshold
Specifies the amount of extra kW capacity the available

generator sets should have if a generator set is shut
down. This has no effect unless Load Demand Threshold
Method is kW.
Default: 1000 kW
154
A029Y787 (Issue 1)
5-2012
13. Load Demand
TABLE 115.
SUMMARY OF MONITOR POINTS (LOAD DEMAND)
Setting
Description
GenX (X = A, B, C, ...)
Indicates the current sequence, where A is the lead

generator set, used by load demand.
Next Gen To Restart
Indicates which generator set is the next generator set to

be restarted.
Next Gen Restart Threshold
Indicates at what load level the next generator set will be

restarted.
Next Gen To Shutdown
Indicates which generator set is the next generator set to

be shut down.
Next Gen Shutdown Threshold
Indicates at what load level the next generator set will be

shut down.
The capacity in Total Online Capacity plus the sum of the

ratings of the generator sets that have started or restarted
but not come online yet. This is used by load demand to
avoid restarting another generator set until a previouslyrestarted generator set either closes its paralleling
breaker or fails to come online.
A029Y787 (Issue 1)
155
13. Load Demand
5-2012
156
A029Y787 (Issue 1)
14
Scheduler
The scheduler provides the ability to start the generator sets automatically at preset times. For
example, you might use this to exercise the generators regularly. Alternatively, you might use
this to run in extended parallel during a certain period each day to avoid increased charges from
the utility.
When the generator sets run, the system can run in Test With Load mode, Test Without Load
mode, or Extended Paralleling mode.
14.1
Real-time Clock
The real-time clock tracks the current date and current time. It is used to calculate controller ontime and by the scheduler.
The current date automatically adjusts for months with less than 31 days and for leap years.
The current time is tracked in 24-hour format.
14.1.1 Daylight Saving Time

Daylight saving time, also known as summer time, is the practice of temporarily advancing
clocks during the summertime so that afternoons have more daylight and mornings have less.
Usually, clocks are set ahead one hour in the spring and set back one hour in autumn, but the
specific days and the amount of time varies by location.
14.1.2 Daylight Saving Time Enable

If Daylight Saving Time Enable is Enabled, the real-time clock is automatically adjusted for
daylight saving time.
The real-time clock is set ahead by Daylight Saving Time Adjustment when the current date and
current time meets the following conditions.
Daylight Saving Time Start Month (1-12, 1 = January, 2 = February, etc.)
Daylight Saving Time Start Week (1-5, 1 = first, 2 = second, etc.)
Daylight Saving Time Start Day (0-6, 0 = Sunday, 1 = Monday, etc.)
Daylight Saving Time Start Hour (0-23)
For example, the real-time clock may be set ahead on the third Tuesday in March at 1:00.
The real-time clock is set back by Daylight Saving Time Adjustment when the current date and
current time meets a similar set of conditions at the end of daylight saving time.
If Daylight Saving Time Enable is Disabled before the end of daylight savings time, the real-time
clock is not adjusted.
A029Y787 (Issue 1)
157
14. Scheduler
5-2012
14.1.3 Summary of Settings (Real-time Clock)

TABLE 116.
SUMMARY OF SETTINGS (REAL-TIME CLOCK)
Setting
Description
Clock Mode
Specifies the operating mode of the real-time clock.

Possible values:
Normal: The real-time clock is running, and it updates the
current date and the current time.
Set Clock: The real-time clock stops updating the current
date and the current time so that they can be set. The
real-time clock continues to run. If Clock Mode is Normal,
the current date and time are correct.
Save Clock: The current date and the current time are
updated based on the values in the current date and the
current time. The status returns to Normal.
Clock Year
Clock Month
Clock Date
Specifies the current date in the real-time clock. If Clock

Mode is Set Clock, the current date can be set.
Clock Hour
Clock Minute
Clock Second
Specifies the current time in the real-time clock. If Clock

Mode is Set Clock, the current time can be set.
Daylight Saving Time Enable
Enables or disables the adjustment of the real-time clock

due to daylight saving time.
Possible values: -50~50 degrees (Default: 0 degrees)
Daylight Saving Time Start Month, Week, Day, Hour
Specifies the beginning of daylight saving time.
Daylight Saving Time End Month, Week, Day, Hour
Specifies the end of daylight saving time.
Daylight Saving Time Adjustment
Specifies how much the real-time clock is advanced at the

beginning of daylight saving time and set back at the end
of daylight saving time.
14.1.4 Code 1689 - Real-time Clock Power Interrupt

The real-time clock has not been set after power-up, or the real-time clock lost power for at least
24 hours.
Set the real-time clock to reset this code.
14.1.5 Effects of Code 1689

The scheduler is inactive.
14.2
Scheduler Enable
System Scheduler Enable is Enabled.
Code 1689 (Real Time Clock Power Interrupt) is inactive.
158
A029Y787 (Issue 1)
5-2012
14. Scheduler
14.2.1 Automatic Changes of System Scheduler Enable

System Scheduler Enable is set to Disabled automatically if any of these conditions are met.
Cancel Scheduler If Modbus Fail Enable is Enabled, and code 2939 (Modbus
Communication Failure Warning) is active.
System Scheduler Enable does not change back to its original value when the conditions above
are no longer met. The setting has to be changed manually.
14.3
Scheduled Programs
Scheduled programs specify when the generator sets should run.
Each scheduled program includes the following information:
When the generator sets should start
How long the generator sets should run
In what mode the generator sets should run
How often the program repeats
The following examples show what happens if two or more scheduled programs overlap.
FIGURE 81.
SCHEDULED PROGRAM P1 BEGINS BEFORE SCHEDULED PROGRAM P2
In Figure 81, scheduled program P1 runs because it starts earlier. Scheduled program P2 does
not run, even if it finishes later.
FIGURE 82.
SCHEDULED PROGRAM P1 AND SCHEDULED PROGRAM P2 BEGIN AT THE SAME

TIME
In Figure 82, scheduled program P1 runs because it has the lowest number. Scheduled
program P2 does not run, even if it finishes later.
14.4
Exceptions
Exceptions prevent scheduled programs from starting during specific times. Exceptions do not
stop a scheduled program that is already running.
Each exception includes the following information:
When the exception begins
A029Y787 (Issue 1)
159
14. Scheduler
5-2012
How long the exception lasts

How often the exception repeats
The following examples show what happens when a scheduled program overlaps an exception.
FIGURE 83.
SCHEDULED PROGRAM P1 BEGINS BEFORE EXCEPTION E1
In Figure 83, the scheduled program runs normally because it starts before the exception starts.
Exception E1 has no effect.
FIGURE 84.
SCHEDULED PROGRAM P1 AND EXCEPTION E1 BEGIN AT THE SAME TIME
In Figure 84, the scheduled program is ignored because the exception is active.
FIGURE 85.
SCHEDULED PROGRAM P1 BEGINS AFTER EXCEPTION E1
In Figure 85, the scheduled program is ignored because the exception is active.
If two or more exceptions overlap, they follow the same rules that are followed if two or more
scheduled programs overlap.
14.5
Scheduler Specifications
TABLE 117.
Description
SCHEDULER SPECIFICATIONS
Value
Number of scheduled programs
12
Number of exceptions
160
A029Y787 (Issue 1)
5-2012
14.6
14. Scheduler
Summary of Settings (Scheduler)

TABLE 118.
SUMMARY OF SETTINGS (SCHEDULER)
Setting
Description
System Scheduler Enable
Enables or disables the scheduler.

Scheduler Program N Enable, Run Mode, Start Day, Start (N is the number of the scheduled program.) Specifies the
Hour, Start Minute, Duration Hours, Duration Minutes,
scheduled program.
Repeat Interval
Scheduler Exception N Enable, Month, Date, Hour,
(N is the number of the exception.) Specifies the
Minute, Duration Days, Duration Hours, Duration Minutes, exception.
Repeat
Cancel Scheduler If Modbus Fail Enable
Enables or disables the scheduler if code 2939 (Modbus

Communication Failure Warning) is active.
Scheduler Program Select
Selects the scheduled program to put into the Scheduler

Program x settings.
Scheduler Program x Enable, Run Mode, Start Day, Start

Hour, Start Minute, Duration Hours, Duration Minutes,
Repeat Interval
Specifies the scheduled program selected in Scheduler

Program Select. If these values are updated, the
scheduled program is updated.
Scheduler Exception Select
Selects the exception to put into the Scheduler Exception

x settings.
Scheduler Exception x Enable, Month, Date, Hour,

Specifies the exception selected in Scheduler Exception
Minute, Duration Days, Duration Hours, Duration Minutes, Select. If these values are updated, the exception is
Repeat
updated.
TABLE 119.
SUMMARY OF MONITOR POINTS (SCHEDULER)
Setting
Description
Active Schedule
Indicates which scheduled program or exception is

running.
Scheduler Run Command
Indicates what kind of action the scheduler is driving. This

is used in the power transfer control (PTC) logic.
Possible values: Off, No Load, With Load, Extended
Parallel
A029Y787 (Issue 1)
161
14. Scheduler
5-2012
162
A029Y787 (Issue 1)
15
Manual Mode
In Manual mode, the sources are connected and disconnected manually. The sources are not
connected or disconnected by the power transfer control (PTC) logic.
Manual mode is also required to change System Topology or to upload firmware to the
MCM3320.
15.1
Conditions for Entering Manual Mode

Auto/Manual Sw is Manual.
15.2
Conditions for Leaving Manual Mode

Auto/Manual Sw is Auto.
15.3
Auto/Manual Switch
Auto/Manual connection (TB10-6, TB10-17)
Modbus networks
InPower
This switch is Manual when any of these sources is active. It remains Manual until all of the
NOTE:
switch inactive.
This switch puts the MCM3320 in Manual mode.
15.4
Monitoring Breaker Position in Manual Mode

In Manual mode, the utility main breaker and the generator set main breaker are treated as
single-contact breakers. This allows breakers to be racked out to the disconnected position or
test position without generating nuisance faults about breaker position contacts.
In general, this has no effect on behavior, though it affects how breaker position contact faults
are generated if the breakers are actually dual-contact breakers.
15.5
Commit to Transfer in Manual Mode

In Manual mode, the system is unable to commit to transferring the loads to the generator sets.
As a result, if PTC Operating Mode becomes Utility Fail, PTC Operating Mode remains in Utility
Fail even if the utility becomes available again.
A029Y787 (Issue 1)
163
15. Manual Mode
15.6
5-2012
Breaker Control in Manual Mode
FIGURE 86.
BREAKER CONTROL IN MANUAL
The breakers are controlled by Gen CB Manual Control and Util CB Manual Control.
Sources can be disconnected immediately.
If PTC State is No Source Connected, the generator sets or the utility can be connected
after Programmed Transition Delay (TDPT) expires.
In order to connect the sources in parallel, the generator sets must be synchronized with
the utility, and PTC Operating Transition Type cannot be Open Transition.
NOTE:

Isolated Bus with Generator Set Main Breaker, PTC Operating Transition
Type is always Open Transition.
15.6.1 Programmed Transition Time Delay

This allows residual voltage from inductive loads to decay to an acceptable level before the
transfer is completed.
This is also known as Time Delay Programmed Transition (TDPT).
15.6.2 Maximum Parallel Timer in Manual Mode

This timer depends on PTC Operating Mode, not PTC Transfer Pair Operating Mode. This timer
will run if PTC Operating Mode is not Extended Parallel. If the timer expires, the generator sets
are not disconnected immediately, however.
15.6.3 Master Inhibit

Modbus networks
InPower
164
A029Y787 (Issue 1)
5-2012
15. Manual Mode
NOTE:
switch inactive.
Connected.
Synchronizer
15.6.4 Generator Set Breaker Inhibit

Modbus networks
InPower
NOTE:
switch inactive.
6.1.2 on page 87).
15.6.5 Utility Main Breaker Inhibit

Modbus networks
InPower
NOTE:
switch inactive.
page 88).
A029Y787 (Issue 1)
165
15. Manual Mode
5-2012
15.6.6 Fail to Disconnect Enable

If Fail to Disconnect Enable is Enabled, the system takes additional actions to try to disconnect
one of the sources when the generator sets are running in parallel with the utility.
If code 1453 (Genset Main Breaker Fail to Open) is active, the utility is disconnected
immediately.
If code 2397 (Utility Main Breaker Fail to Open) is active, the generator sets are
disconnected immediately.
In addition, code 1121 (Fail to Disconnect) is enabled.
15.7
Generator Set Control in Manual Mode

Manual mode has no effect on PTC Genset Operating Mode. The generator sets start and stop
the same way they do in Auto mode.
15.8
Load Control in Manual Mode

When PTC State is Paralleled, load control tells the generator sets to run at 0%. Load control
does not support extended parallel or soft-closed transitions in Manual mode.
15.8.1 Load Control at Other Times

When PTC State is not Paralleled, load control still sends signals to the generator sets. The
generator sets may not respond to these signals depending on the generator set control and its
configuration.
When PTC State is not Paralleled, load control tells the generator sets to ramp up their loads if
these conditions are met.
PTC State is Utility Connected.
Otherwise, load control tells the generator sets to ramp down their loads.
15.9
Synchronizer Status in Manual Mode

The synchronizer enable switch is active.
15.9.1 Synchronizer Enable Switch

Synchronizer Enable Switch connection (TB1-10, TB1-11)
Modbus networks
InPower
166
A029Y787 (Issue 1)
5-2012
15. Manual Mode
NOTE:
switch inactive.
15.10 Load Add/Shed in Manual Mode

Load add/shed is available in Manual mode.
Automatic load add can start if the utility main breaker is open when one of these conditions is
met.
first generator set closes its paralleling breaker.
If the topology is Isolated Bus with Generator Set Main Breaker or Transfer Pair, the
generator set main breaker closes.
If automatic load add does not start, the loads have to be added manually.
The remaining features in load add/shed operate normally.
15.11 Load Demand in Manual Mode

Load demand is available in Manual mode.
15.12 Scheduler in Manual Mode

The scheduler is available in Manual mode. However, breaker control is manual, so every
scheduled program behaves like a test without load.
15.13 Summary of Settings (Manual Mode)

TABLE 120.
SUMMARY OF SETTINGS (MANUAL MODE)
Setting
Description
Auto/Manual Vol
Sets the auto/manual switch.

Possible values: Auto, Manual
Synchronizer Enable Vol
Sets the synchronizer enable switch.

TABLE 121.
SUMMARY OF MONITOR POINTS (MANUAL MODE)
Setting
Description
Auto/Manual Sw
Indicates the state of the auto/manual switch.
Synchronizer Enable Sw
Indicates the state of the synchronizer enable switch.
A029Y787 (Issue 1)
167
15. Manual Mode
5-2012
168
A029Y787 (Issue 1)
16
Master Synchronize Only

If the topology is Master Synchronize Only, the synchronizer is available. Other features are not
active.
16.1
Generator Set Availability (Three-phase

Applications in Master Synchronize Only or
Component Mode)
The generator sets are unavailable when at least one of these conditions is not met.
16.2
Utility Availability (Three-phase Applications in

Master Synchronize Only and Component Mode)
The utility is available when none of the PTC sensors for the utility are Dropped-out.
The utility is not available when at least one of PTC sensors for the utility is Dropped-out.
16.3
PTC State and PTC Operating Mode in Master

Synchronize Only
In this topology, PTC State is PTC Not Enabled, and PTC Operating Mode is Normal.
16.4
Synchronizer Status in Master Synchronize Only

and Component Mode
16.5

A029Y787 (Issue 1)
169
16. Master Synchronize Only
5-2012

Modbus networks
InPower
NOTE:
16.6
switch inactive.
Synchronizer Check in Master Synchronize Only or

Component Mode
If the topology is Master Synchronize Only or Component Mode, Sync Check Close Allowed can
be Allowed in a variety of conditions. Each condition is enabled or disabled by a different
setting.
TABLE 122.
SYNC CHECK CLOSE ALLOWED (MASTER SYNCHRONIZE ONLY OR COMPONENT

MODE)
Setting
170
Condition
Sync Check Dead Utility Dead Genset Enable
The utility bus is dead, and the generator set bus is dead.
Sync Check Dead Utility Live Genset Enable
The utility bus is dead, and the generator sets are

available.
Sync Check Live Utility Dead Genset Enable
The utility is available, and the generator set bus is dead.
Sync Check Live Utility Live Genset Enable
Permissive Close Allowed is Allowed.
A029Y787 (Issue 1)
17
SYNC1320
The SYNC1320 is a MCM3320 in which the topology is Master Synchronize Only.
The SYNC1320 base board is a depopulated MCM3320 base board. Depopulation reduces the
capabilities of the SYNC1320 compared to a MCM3320 in Master Synchronize Only.
No current sensing
No Modbus connections
No PCCNet connections, including the operator panel
Starting with software version 1.29, the SYNC1320 can be used in single-phase applications as
well as three-phase applications. This has an impact on the synchronizer, which only supports
three-phase applications in the MCM3320. In addition, when the SYNC1320 is used in singlephase applications, source availability is different.
See 0900-0662 for more information about the SYNC1320.
17.1
Generator Set Availability (Single-phase

Applications)
The generator sets are available when the generator set voltage is at least 60% of nominal
voltage.
The generator sets are not available when the generator set voltage is less than 60% of nominal
voltage.
17.2
Utility Availability (Single-phase Applications)

The utility is available when the utility voltage is at least 60% of nominal voltage.
The utility is not available when the utility voltage is less than 60% of nominal voltage.
17.3
Synchronizer in the SYNC1320

The synchronizer in the SYNC1320 can support single-phase applications or three-phase
applications. Set Synchronizer Type based on the application.
The single-phase synchronizer and the three-phase synchronizer operate the same way the
synchronizer in the MCM3320 operates.
A029Y787 (Issue 1)
171
17. SYNC1320
5-2012
172
A029Y787 (Issue 1)
18
Component Mode
If the topology is Component Mode, the synchronizer and load control are available. Other
features are not active.
18.1
Generator Set Availability (Three-phase

Applications in Master Synchronize Only or
Component Mode)
The generator sets are unavailable when at least one of these conditions is not met.
18.2
Utility Availability (Three-phase Applications in

Master Synchronize Only and Component Mode)
The utility is available when none of the PTC sensors for the utility are Dropped-out.
The utility is not available when at least one of PTC sensors for the utility is Dropped-out.
18.3
PTC State and PTC Operating Mode in Component

Mode
In this topology, PTC State and PTC Operating Mode are writable values. They are used in load
control.
Regardless of PTC State and PTC Operating Mode, there is no breaker control or generator set
control in Component mode.
18.4
Synchronizer Status in Master Synchronize Only

and Component Mode
18.5

A029Y787 (Issue 1)
173
18. Component Mode
5-2012


Modbus networks
InPower
NOTE:
18.6
switch inactive.
Synchronizer Check in Master Synchronize Only or

Component Mode
If the topology is Master Synchronize Only or Component Mode, Sync Check Close Allowed can
be Allowed in a variety of conditions. Each condition is enabled or disabled by a different
setting.
TABLE 123.
SYNC CHECK CLOSE ALLOWED (MASTER SYNCHRONIZE ONLY OR COMPONENT

MODE)
Setting
Condition
Sync Check Dead Utility Dead Genset Enable
The utility bus is dead, and the generator set bus is dead.
Sync Check Dead Utility Live Genset Enable
The utility bus is dead, and the generator sets are

available.
Sync Check Live Utility Dead Genset Enable
The utility is available, and the generator set bus is dead.
Sync Check Live Utility Live Genset Enable
Permissive Close Allowed is Allowed.
18.7
Load Control in Component Mode

Load control operates the same in Component mode, but PTC State and PTC Operating Mode
have to be set externally to get the desired behavior.
NOTE:
174
In Component mode, PTC State and PTC Operating Mode are not calculated
internally. Instead, they have to be set externally.
A029Y787 (Issue 1)
5-2012
18.8
18. Component Mode
Load Control Based on PTC State and PTC

Operating Mode
TABLE 124.
LOAD CONTROL BASED ON PTC STATE AND PTC OPERATING MODE
PTC State
PTC Operating Mode
Load Control
PTC Not Enabled

No Source Connected
Genset Connected
any
Ramp down
Utility Connected
Extended Parallel
Ramp down
Utility Connected
any except Extended Parallel
Ramp up
Paralleled
Utility Fail
Normal Override
Normal
Ramp down
Paralleled
Extended Parallel
kW load control and kVAR load

control
Paralleled
Test
Ramp up
If PTC State is Paralleled, the load control that is indicated applies only in Auto mode.
18.9
Load Control in Manual Mode

When PTC State is Paralleled, load control tells the generator sets to run at 0%. Load control
does not support extended parallel or soft-closed transitions in Manual mode.
A029Y787 (Issue 1)
175
18. Component Mode
5-2012
176
A029Y787 (Issue 1)
19
Troubleshooting
19.1
Events
An event becomes active when the event condition becomes true.
The event remains active until the event condition becomes false.
19.1.1 Code 1222 - Not in Automatic

The MCM3320 is in Manual mode.
19.1.2 Code 1483 - Common Alarm

19.1.3 Code 1534 - Load Control Output Event

This is active if any of these conditions is met.
19.1.4 Code 1916 - Synchronized Event

The generator sets are synchronized with the utility.
19.1.5 Code 2328 - Utility Bus Available Event

19.1.6 Code 2332 - Utility Bus Connected Event

19.1.7 Code 2333 - Generator Set Bus Connected Event

19.1.8 Code 2779 - Utility Unloaded Event

The real power provided by the utility is less than Utility Unloaded Level.
This code can be generated when PTC Operating Transition Type is Soft Closed Transition or
the topology is Component Mode.
19.1.9 Code 2781 - Genset Unloaded Event

The real power provided by the generator sets is less than Genset Unloaded Level.
This code can be generated when PTC Operating Transition Type is Soft Closed Transition or
the topology is Component Mode.
A029Y787 (Issue 1)
177
19. Troubleshooting
5-2012
19.1.10 Code 2965 - Generator Set Bus Available Event

19.1.11 Code 2971 - Test/Extended Parallel Event

PTC Operating Mode is Test or Extended Parallel.
19.1.12 Code 3226 - Genset Bus Base Load Event

While the generator sets are running in parallel with the utility in extended parallel mode,
Extended Paralleling kW Load Control Type is Genset Bus % Level, Genset Bus kW, or Genset
Bus kW w/Utility Constraint.
19.1.13 Code 3227 - Utility Peak Shave Event

While the generator sets are running in parallel with the utility in extended parallel mode,
Extended Paralleling kW Load Control Type is Utility Bus kW.
19.2
Faults
A fault becomes active when the fault condition becomes true.
The fault remains active until the fault condition is false and the fault reset signal is active.
19.2.1 Fault Reset

Fault Reset connection (TB2-14, TB2-5)
Modbus networks (Fault Reset Vol)
InPower (Fault Reset Vol)
NOTE:
When Fault Reset Vol is set to Reset, it is automatically set to Not Reset 0.5
seconds later.
NOTE:
switch inactive.
This switch has a different effect depending how long it is active.

If this switch becomes inactive in less than five seconds, this switch resets all active faults.
Each fault becomes inactive if the associated fault condition is no longer true.
If this switch remains active for five seconds, U51 starts displaying the active faults. This
switch has no more effect until the next time it changes from inactive to active.
19.2.2 System Lockout Status

System Lockout Status indicates whether or not one or more active faults are preventing normal
operation. For example, if code 2396 (Utility Main Breaker Fail to Close) is active, the utility is
considered unavailable, and the system responds accordingly.
178
A029Y787 (Issue 1)
5-2012
19. Troubleshooting
System Lockout Status does not affect the operation of the MCM3320. It is for descriptive
purposes only. It is available over network connections, such as PCCNet, Modbus, or InPower.
19.2.3 Conditions for System Lockout Status

System Lockout Status is active if any of these conditions is met.
Code 1219 (Utility Main Breaker Tripped) is active.
Code 1328 (Generator Set Main Breaker Tripped) is active.
Code 1444 (Generator Set Bus Overload) is active, and Load Add Shed Enable is
Enabled.
Code 1444 (Generator Set Bus Overload) is active, and Load Demand Enable is Enabled.
Code 1452 (Generator Set Main Breaker Fail to Close) is active.
Code 1453 (Generator Set Main Breaker Fail to Open) is active.
Code 1454 (Generator Set Main Breaker Position Contact) is active.
Code 1455 (Utility Main Breaker Position Contact) is active.
Code 1457 (Fail to Synchronize Warning) is active, and Fail to Sync Lockout Enable is
Enabled.
Code 1999 (Maximum Parallel Time) is active.
Code 2396 (Utility Main Breaker Fail to Close) is active.
Code 2397 (Utility Main Breaker Fail to Open) is active.
System Lockout Status is inactive if none of these conditions are met.
19.3
Troubleshooting Procedures
19.3.1 No Code - AUX 101 Does Not Communicate

One or more AUX101 boards are not communicating with the MCM3320.
A. Check System Topology

PCCNet devices will not communicate with the MCM3320 if the System Topology of the
MCM3320 is set to Master Synchronizer Mode or Component Mode. Use InPower to verify
the topologies. Disconnect the J14 connector from the MCM3320, and connect InPower to
the MCM3320. Access Adjustments > System Setup > System Topology.
B. Verify PCCNet Connections

1. Verify PCCNet connections by checking for continuity between the following items:
AUX 101 J1-3, MCM3320 TB1-1, and any corresponding terminal in the PCCNet
network
network
A029Y787 (Issue 1)
179
19. Troubleshooting
5-2012
2. Verify the proper identifier is displayed on the 7-segment display of the AUX 101
board.
3. Verify the green DS1 indicator is lit on the AUX 101 board. A green light indicates
PCCNet communication.
C. Check Compatibility of Software Versions

Verify that the MCM3320 software version is V2.0 or later. Disconnect the J14 connector
from the MCM3320, and connect InPower to the MCM3320. Access Monitor > Controller
Information > Software Version. Update the calibration if necessary.
Verify that the AUX 101 software version is V1.48 or later. Access Monitor > Controller
Information > AUX101 Software Version. Update the calibration if necessary.
Make sure the AUX 101 and MCM3320 software versions are compatible with each other.
See Section 4.4.5 on page 52.
19.3.2 No Code - Fault Codes Do Not Reset

One or more active faults do not reset.
A. Check Active Faults

Troubleshoot any active faults. Verify the conditions that cause the faults are no longer
present.
B. Check Control Voltage

Verify there is control voltage at TB2-14 in the MCM3320. Measure the voltage across
terminal TB2-14 and a ground terminal (TB2-6).
C. Verify Fault Reset Connections

Verify fault reset connections by checking for continuity between the following items:
TB2-14 (MCM3320) to the corresponding terminal in the switchgear
Use the interconnect and switchgear schematics to perform this check.
D. Check Operation of Fault Reset Relay

1. Make sure that there is control voltage at each terminal of the fault reset relay. This
can be done by jumpering each relay terminal across a ground or B+ terminal with a
multimeter.
2. Make sure that there is continuity between the contacts of the fault reset relay. If it is a
normally-open relay, then, when the relay is energized, there will be continuity
between the contacts. If it is a normally closed relay, then, when the relay is
energized, there will be no continuity between the contacts.
19.3.3 No Code - Incorrect Generator Set Bus Metering

The voltage, current, frequency, power, or phase for the generator set bus is missing or
incorrect in the MCM3320.
180
A029Y787 (Issue 1)
5-2012
19. Troubleshooting
A. Check Shorting Block

If there is a shorting block, verify that the shorting block connections are removed from the
shorting block.
B. Check Generator Set Bus Current-sensing Circuit

Verify there are no wiring issues with the current-sensing connections to the MCM3320 by
performing the following steps.
1. Verify that the wire passes through CTs on the MCM3320 once for 5 A units and twice
for 1 A units.
2. Verify that the wires passing through the CTs on the MCM3320 are connected to the
corresponding terminals in the switchgear. Refer to the interconnection and switchgear
schematics for details.
3. Verify there are no broken or loose connections in the current-sensing circuit.
19.3.4 No Code - Incorrect Utility Metering

The voltage, current, frequency, power, or phase for the utility is missing or incorrect in the
MCM3320.
A. Check Shorting Block

If there is a shorting block, verify that the shorting block connections are removed from the
shorting block.
B. Check Utility Current-sensing Circuit

for 1 A units.
19.3.5 No Code - Operator Panel Is Not Communicating

The HMI211 is not communicating with the MCM3320. The HMI211 screen displays the
message Re-establishing communication with control. The indicators on the HMI211 may be
on or off.
A. Verify PCCNet Connections

HMI 211 J1-2, MCM3320 TB1-1, and any corresponding terminal in the PCCNet
network
HMI 211 J1-33, MCM3320 TB1-3, and any corresponding terminal in the PCCNet
network
A029Y787 (Issue 1)
181
19. Troubleshooting
5-2012
2. Make sure the shield is grounded at TB1-4 in the MCM3320.

3. Verify that there is 120 ohm terminating resistor at each end of the two wire twisted
pair RS485.
B. Check Part Number of HMI 211

The MCM3320 supports part number 0300-6090.
C. Check Communication Settings

1. Disconnect the J14 connector from the MCM3320, and connect InPower to the
MCM3320.
2. Check the communication setting in the MCM3320. Access Adjustments >
Communications Adjustments > Port Protocol Selection > PCCNet.
D. Check System Topology

19.3.6 Code 343 - Hardware Failure MCM3320

Power to the MCM3320 has been lost, or one of the hardware faults is active.
Code 353 (EEPROM Write Error)
Code 1335 (AC Metering Out of Range)
Code 2416 (Calibration Checksum)
A. Cycle Power
Cycle power to the MCM3320 to see if the fault clears.
B. Check Calibration
Perform an update calibration using the InPower service tool. Disconnect the J14
connector from the MCM3320, and connect InPower to the MCM3320.
If unable to perform an update calibration, perform an initial calibration.
If unable to perform an initial calibration, replace the MCM3320 base board.
C. Troubleshoot Related Fault Codes

Troubleshoot the fault codes that are related to this code.
19.3.7 Code 353 - EEPROM Write Error

A current value in RAM memory (a to-be-written value) is different from its post-written value in
EEPROM. An attempt may have been made to save trims in InPower or in the operator panel
and it was not successful. Alternatively, the error may have occurred when the MCM3320 tried
to automatically save data on a periodic basis.
182
A029Y787 (Issue 1)
5-2012
19. Troubleshooting
NOTE:
This fault is more common after major software releases, for example, 1.XX
to 2.XX. If the software was upgraded recently, perform a second initial
calibration, and cycle power.
This code cannot be reset without cycling power to the MCM3320.
19.3.7.1 Effects of Code 353

Any values not saved correctly have to be updated again.
A. Cycle Power
19.3.8 Code 441 - Low Battery Voltage

This code depends on Nominal Battery Voltage.
TABLE 125.
NOMINAL BATTERY VOLTAGE
Value
Description
12 V
The battery voltage is less than 12 V Low Battery Voltage Threshold for Low
Battery Voltage Set Time.
24 V
The battery voltage is less than 24 V Low Battery Voltage Threshold for Low
This code cannot be reset until the battery voltage is above the indicated threshold for Low
A. Verify Battery Voltage Settings

Verify that the battery voltage matches Nominal Battery Voltage. This setting depends on
the application.
To access the battery voltage setup menu in InPower, go to Adjustments > Battery
Voltage Protection Setup > Nominal Battery Voltage.
B. Verify Battery Connections

Check the connections between the batteries and the MCM.
Battery +: TB2-8, TB2-9, TB2-11, and TB2-12
Battery : TB2-2, TB2-3, TB2-5, and TB2-7
Check for continuity, and make sure there are no broken or loose connections in the wires.
Use the interconnection and switchgear schematics to perform the check.
A029Y787 (Issue 1)
183
19. Troubleshooting
5-2012
C. Verify Batteries Are Charged

Verify that the generator set battery chargers are charging the generator set batteries at an
acceptable charging rate.
Adjust the charging rate of the battery charger if the charging rate is below the
recommendation of the manufacturer. Refer to the battery charger manual for details.
D. Verify Batteries Can Hold Charge

Verify the generator set cranking batteries are able to hold a charge by performing the
following steps.
1. Measure the output voltage of the generator set cranking batteries with a voltmeter.
The measured voltage should be 2328 VDC for a 24-VDC system or 1116 VDC for
a 12-VDC system. If the battery voltage is low, check the electrolyte level (applicable
for lead acid batteries only). Replenish the electrolyte level if it is low, and recharge
the battery.
2. Check the specific gravity of the generator set batteries. The specific gravity of a fullycharged lead-acid battery is approximately 1.260 at 80 F (27 C).
3. Check the battery ground connections to verify proper grounding.
4. Replace the batteries if the generator set batteries still cannot hold a charge.
19.3.9 Code 442 - High Battery Voltage

This code depends on Nominal Battery Voltage.
TABLE 126.
NOMINAL BATTERY VOLTAGE
Value
Description
12 V
The battery voltage is higher than 12 V High Battery Voltage Threshold for High
24 V
The battery voltage is higher than 24 V High Battery Voltage Threshold for High
This code cannot be reset until the battery voltage is below the indicated threshold for High
A. Verify Battery Voltage Settings

Verify that the battery voltage matches Nominal Battery Voltage. This setting depends on
the application.
To access the battery voltage setup menu in InPower, go to Adjustments > Battery
Voltage Protection Setup > Nominal Battery Voltage.
B. Verify Battery Charging Rate

Verify the generator set battery charger is not overcharging the batteries beyond the high
voltage threshold by performing the following steps.
1. Verify the generator set battery charger is charging the generator set batteries at an
acceptable rate.
184
A029Y787 (Issue 1)
5-2012
19. Troubleshooting
2. Adjust the charging rate of the battery charger if the charging rate is above the
recommendation of the manufacturer. Refer to the battery charger manual for details.
19.3.10 Code 1121 - Fail to Disconnect

This code is active if all of these conditions are met.
Fail to Disconnect Enable is Enable.
Code 2397 (Utility Main Breaker Fail to Open) is active.
Code 1453 (Generator Set Main Breaker Fail to Open) is active.

The generator set paralleling breakers are inhibited in a final attempt to disconnect the
generator sets from the utility.
If PTC State is Paralleled, load control tells the generator sets to ramp down to avoid exporting
power to the utility. This also extends the amount of time the generator sets can run so that
there is more time for corrective action.
A. Troubleshoot Related Fault Codes

19.3.11 Code 1219 - Utility Main Breaker Tripped

The input for utility main breaker tripped is active.

The utility is not available in three-phase applications. (This effect ends when the conditions that
caused the code are no longer true. The fault does not have to be reset.)
A. Check Tripped Status

Verify the breaker is actually tripped.
If it is tripped, check for over current or short circuits.
If it is not tripped, check the trip feedback contact.
B. Check Over-current or Short Circuit Condition

1. Determine whether an over-current or short circuit condition occurred downstream
from the breaker.
2. If one of the conditions did occur, contact the electrical contractor for the site and wait
until the fault is cleared.
If none of the conditions occurred, check the circuit breaker manual.
3. Reset the circuit breaker manually after the fault is cleared.
A029Y787 (Issue 1)
185
19. Troubleshooting
5-2012
C. Check Utility Main Breaker Trip Feedback Contact

Verify the wiring from the utility main breaker to the tripped status input on the MCM3320
by performing the following steps.
1. Verify the physical status of the utility main breaker at the switchgear by checking the
breaker position indicator and the trip indicator/lock out relay status.
If the breaker position indicator and trip indicator/lock out are inactive state/OFF (i.e.,
utility main breaker is closed), and there still is an active breaker trip feedback to the
MCM3320, proceed with the following steps.
2. Disconnect terminal block TB10 from MCM3320, and check for continuity between
TB10-10 (MCM3320) and the corresponding terminal(s) in the switchgear. Use the
interconnection and switchgear schematics to identify the terminal(s).
3. Disconnect terminal block TB10 from MCM3320, and check for continuity between
TB10-08 (MCM3320) and the corresponding terminal(s) in the switchgear.
19.3.12 Code 1223 - Utility Bus Frequency

Utility Frequency Sensor Status is Dropped-out.
19.3.12.1 Utility Frequency Sensor

Utility Frequency Sensor Enable must be set to Enable.
186
A029Y787 (Issue 1)
5-2012
19. Troubleshooting
Time (t)
initial
Event
Sensor Status
Picked-Up
t1

graph D, Utility Center Frequency + (Utility Frequency Pick-Up
OR
graph D, Utility Center Frequency - (Utility Frequency Pick-Up
Picked-Up
t1+tD

threshold (D) for a specified time delay (tD, Utility Frequency DropOut Delay).
Dropped-Out
(shaded area)
t2
The frequency (Hz) falls below the picked-up threshold (P, Utility
Center Frequency + Utility Frequency Pick-Up Bandwidth).
AND
The frequency (Hz) remains above the picked-up threshold (P,
Utility Center Frequency - Utility Frequency Pick-Up Bandwidth).
FIGURE 87.
Picked-Up
UTILITY FREQUENCY SENSOR

A029Y787 (Issue 1)
187
19. Troubleshooting
5-2012
A. Verify Utility Frequency Sensor Settings

Disconnect the J14 connector from the MCM3320, and connect InPower to the MCM3320.
Access Adjustments > Power Transfer Control Adjustments > Utility Sensor Adjustments,
and check these settings.
Utility Center Frequency; this should match the system frequency.
Utility Frequency Drop-Out Bandwidth and Utility Frequency Pick-Up Bandwidth; these
settings should not be too tight to allow for normal source fluctuation. Settings that are
too tight will activate this fault even for slight variations in frequency, such as ones
resulting from minor transients or the switching of devices.
Utility Frequency Drop-Out Delay; this should not be too short to allow for normal
source fluctuation.
NOTE:
To disable this code, set Utility Frequency Sensor Enable to Disable.
B. Check Utility Frequency Instability

The utility frequency may be unstable. Check with the respective utility company for
variations in frequency, and wait for the utility frequency to stabilize.
19.3.13 Code 1224 - Generator Set Bus Over Voltage

Genset Overvoltage Sensor Status is Dropped-out.
19.3.13.1 Generator Set Overvoltage Sensor

Genset Overvoltage Sensor Enable must be set to Enable.
188
A029Y787 (Issue 1)
5-2012
19. Troubleshooting
Time (t)
initial
t1
t1+tD
t2
Event
Sensor Status
Picked-Up

(D, Genset Overvoltage Drop-Out Percentage).
Picked-Up

threshold (D) for a specified time delay (tD, Genset Overvoltage
Drop-Out Delay).
Genset Overvoltage Pick-Up Percentage * Genset Overvoltage
Drop-Out Percentage).
FIGURE 88.
Dropped-Out
(shaded area)
Picked-Up
GENERATOR SET OVERVOLTAGE SENSOR
When the synchronizer is active, Genset Overvoltage Drop-Out Percentage is temporarily set to
120%, and Genset Overvoltage Pick-Up Percentage is temporarily set to 95%. This prevents the

The generator sets are not available in three-phase applications. (This effect ends when the
conditions that caused the code are no longer true. The fault does not have to be reset.)
A. Check Generator Set Voltage

Run the generator sets, and measure the output voltage from the suspected generator set.
If the output voltage is high or low, see the generator set service manual. A generator set
can produce too much voltage or too little voltage for many reasons, such as faulty PTs,
faulty AVR, faulty PMG, incorrect PT ratio, incorrect PT connections, etc.
B. Check Generator Set Voltage Sensing Circuit

Verify there are no wiring issues with the generator set voltage sensing connections to the
MCM3320 by performing the following steps.
1. Measure the line-to-line voltage input to the MCM3320 from the generator set bus for
the following terminals:
L1, TB6-1
L2, TB6-2
A029Y787 (Issue 1)
189
19. Troubleshooting
5-2012
L3, TB6-3
2. Measure the line-to-neutral voltage input to the MCM3320 from the generator set bus
for the following terminals:
L1, TB6-1
L2, TB6-2
L3, TB6-3
N, TB6-4
3. Measure the line-to-line voltage input into the Potential Transformer from the
generator set bus. The voltage into the PT should match the generator set bus
voltage.
4. Check for continuity between the following terminals and the corresponding terminal at
the switchgear section.
L1 TB6-1 (MCM3320)
L2 TB6-2 (MCM3320)
L3 TB6-3 (MCM3320)
5. Verify that any breakers in the generator set voltage sensing circuit are operational.
Perform a visual inspection of the breaker position indicators. Use the switchgear
schematics to identify the breakers.
C. Verify System and Generator Set Voltage

Verify the system voltage matches the generator set voltage. Disconnect the J14 connector
from the MCM3320, and connect InPower to the MCM3320.
Adjustments > AC Meter Setup > Genset Nominal Voltage
Adjustments > AC Meter Setup > Utility Nominal Voltage
D. Verify Generator Set Voltage Sensing Setup

Verify the voltage sensing setup, with respect to the primary and secondary PT LL,
matches the PTs in the system. Disconnect the J14 connector from the MCM3320, and
connect InPower to the MCM3320. Access Adjustments > AC Meter Setup and then
access the following settings:
Genset PT Primary Voltage
Genset PT Secondary Voltage
E. Verify Generator Set Over Voltage Settings

Verify the generator set over voltage settings, pick-up, drop-out, and drop-out delay are not
too tight to allow for normal source fluctuations. Disconnect the J14 connector from the
MCM3320, and connect InPower to the MCM3320. Access Adjustments > Power Transfer
Control Adjustments > Genset Sensor Adjustments > Genset Over Voltage Settings.
F. Cycle Power
190
A029Y787 (Issue 1)
5-2012
19. Troubleshooting
G. Check Calibration
19.3.14 Code 1225 - Generator Set Bus Under Voltage

These conditions are met.
Genset Undervoltage Sensor Status is Dropped-out.
The generator sets are commanded to run, and Stop Time Delay is not active.
19.3.14.1 Generator Set Undervoltage Sensor

Time (t)
initial
Event
Sensor Status
Picked-Up
t1

(D, Genset Undervoltage Drop-Out Percentage * Genset
Picked-Up
t1+tD

threshold (D) for a specified time delay (tD, Genset Undervoltage
Drop-Out Delay).
Dropped-Out
(shaded area)
t2
Genset Undervoltage Pick-Up Percentage).
FIGURE 89.
Picked-Up
GENERATOR SET UNDERVOLTAGE SENSOR
When the synchronizer is active, Genset Undervoltage Drop-Out Percentage is temporarily set
to 75%, and Genset Undervoltage Pick-Up Percentage is temporarily set to 85%. This prevents
the synchronizer from causing nuisance faults.
A029Y787 (Issue 1)
191
19. Troubleshooting
5-2012

A. Check Generator Set Voltage

Run the generator sets, and measure the output voltage from the suspected generator set.
If the output voltage is low, see the generator set service manual. A generator set can
produce too little voltage for many reasons, such as faulty PTs, faulty AVR, faulty PMG,
incorrect PT ratio, incorrect PT connections, etc.

L1, TB6-1
L2, TB6-2
L3, TB6-3
L1, TB6-1
L2, TB6-2
L3, TB6-3
N, TB6-4
voltage.
L1 TB6-1 (MCM3320)
L2 TB6-2 (MCM3320)
L3 TB6-3 (MCM3320)

192
A029Y787 (Issue 1)
5-2012
19. Troubleshooting
D. Verify Generator Set Voltage Sensing Setup

E. Verify Generator Set Under Voltage Settings

Verify the generator set under voltage settings, pick-up, drop-out, and drop-out delay are
not too tight to allow for normal source fluctuations. Disconnect the J14 connector from the
MCM3320, and connect InPower to the MCM3320. Access Adjustments > Power Transfer
Control Adjustments > Genset Sensor Adjustments > Genset Under Voltage Settings.
F. Cycle Power
19.3.15 Code 1226 - Generator Set Bus Frequency

Genset Frequency Sensor Status is Dropped-out.
19.3.15.1 Generator Set Frequency Sensor

Genset Frequency Sensor Enable must be set to Enable.
A029Y787 (Issue 1)
193
19. Troubleshooting
5-2012
Time (t)
initial
t1
t1+tD
t2
Event
Sensor Status
Picked-Up

graph D, Genset Center Frequency + (Genset Frequency Pick-Up
OR
graph D, Genset Center Frequency - (Genset Frequency Pick-Up
Picked-Up

threshold (D) for a specified time delay (tD, Genset Frequency
Drop-Out Delay).
The frequency (Hz) falls below the picked-up threshold (P, Genset
Center Frequency + Genset Frequency Pick-Up Bandwidth).
AND
The frequency (Hz) rises above the picked-up threshold (P,
Genset Center Frequency - Genset Frequency Pick-Up
Bandwidth).
FIGURE 90.
Dropped-Out
(shaded area)
Picked-Up
GENERATOR SET FREQUENCY SENSOR
When the synchronizer is active, Genset Frequency Drop-Out Bandwidth is temporarily set to
5%, and Genset Frequency Pick-Up Bandwidth is temporarily set to 20%. This prevents the
194
A029Y787 (Issue 1)
5-2012
19. Troubleshooting

A. Check Generator Set Frequency Stability

Determine whether the generator set frequency is stable. If the generator set is hunting or
oscillating, refer to the generator set service manual to address the problem.
B. Verify Generator Set Frequency Sensor Settings

Access Setup > Paralleling Setup > Power Transfer Control, and check these settings.
Genset Center Frequency; this should match the system frequency.
Genset Frequency Drop-Out Bandwidth and Genset Frequency Pick-Up Bandwidth;
these settings should not be too tight to allow for normal source fluctuation. Settings
that are too tight will activate this fault even for slight variations in frequency, such as
ones resulting from minor transients or the switching of devices.
Genset Frequency Drop-Out Delay; this should not be too short to allow for normal
source fluctuation.
NOTE:
To disable this code, set Genset Frequency Sensor Enable to Disable.
19.3.16 Code 1328 - Generator Set Main Breaker Tripped

The input for generator set main breaker tripped is active.

The system cannot commit to transferring the loads to the generator sets.
A. Check Tripped Status

Verify the breaker is actually tripped.
If it is tripped, check for over current or short circuits.
If it is not tripped, check the trip feedback contact.
B. Check Over-current or Short Circuit Condition

1. Determine whether an over-current or short circuit condition occurred downstream
from the breaker.
2. If one of the conditions did occur, contact the electrical contractor for the site and wait
until the fault is cleared.
If none of the conditions occurred, check the circuit breaker manual.
3. Reset the circuit breaker manually after the fault is cleared.
A029Y787 (Issue 1)
195
19. Troubleshooting
5-2012
C. Check Trip Feedback Contact for Generator Set Main Breaker

Verify the wiring by performing the following steps.
1. Verify the physical status of the generator set main breaker at the switchgear by
checking the breaker position indicator and the trip indicator/lock out relay status.
If the breaker position indicator and trip indicator/lock out relay are inactive state/OFF
(i.e., generator set main breaker is closed), and there still is an active breaker trip
feedback to the MCM3320, continue with the following steps.
2. Disconnect terminal block TB10 (MCM3320) and check for continuity between
terminals TB10-03 (MCM3320) and the corresponding terminal in the switchgear. Use
the interconnection and switchgear schematics to identify the switchgear terminal.
3. Disconnect terminal block TB10 (MCM3320) and check for continuity between
terminals TB10-04 (MCM3320) and the corresponding terminal in the switchgear. Use
the interconnection and switchgear schematics to identify the switchgear terminal.
19.3.17 Code 1335 - AC Metering Out of Range

The measured value of voltage, current, kW, kVAR, kVA, or power factor is outside the
programmed range. The measured value can be from the generator sets or the utility.

If load demand is active, load demand becomes inactive. Any generator sets that have stopped
due to load demand are restarted.
A. Verify PT and CT Ratio Settings

Verify the PT and CT ratio settings are set correctly. Make adjustments to the settings if
necessary. Disconnect the J14 connector from the MCM3320, and connect InPower to the
MCM3320. Access Adjustments > AC Meter Setup, and then access the following options:
Genset CT Primary Voltage
Genset CT Secondary Voltage
Utility PT Primary Voltage
Utility PT Secondary Voltage
Utility CT Primary Voltage
Utility CT Secondary Voltage
B. Verify Generator Set Ratings

Verify that the Gen KW Rating of the generator sets in the system are set up correctly in
the MCM3320. Disconnect the J14 connector from the MCM3320, and connect InPower to
the MCM3320. Go to Adjustments > System Setup > Genset (s) KW Rating.
196
A029Y787 (Issue 1)
5-2012
19. Troubleshooting

D. Check Wiring for CT Sensing

Verify the CT sensing wires are run correctly through the onboard CTs in the MCM3320.
Two wires should pass through the CT hole for 1 A
One wire should pass through the CT hole for 5 A
E. Check Generator Set Voltage Sensing Circuit

L1, TB6-1
L2, TB6-2
L3, TB6-3
L1, TB6-1
L2, TB6-2
L3, TB6-3
N, TB6-4
voltage.
L1 TB6-1 (MCM3320)
L2 TB6-2 (MCM3320)
L3 TB6-3 (MCM3320)
A029Y787 (Issue 1)
197
19. Troubleshooting
5-2012
F. Check Utility Voltage Sensing Circuit

Verify there are no wiring issues with the utility voltage sensing connections to the
1. Measure the line-to-line voltage input to the MCM3320 from the Utility Bus for the
following terminals:
L1, TB7-1
L2, TB7-2
L3, TB7-3
2. Measure the line-to-line voltage input to the Potential Transformer (PT) from the Utility
Bus. The voltage into the PT should match the Utility Bus voltage.
3. Check for continuity between the following terminals:
L1 TB7-1 (MCM3320) and the corresponding terminal at the switchgear section
N TB7-4 (MCM3320) and the corresponding terminal at the switchgear section
4. Verify that the breakers in the utility voltage sensing circuit at the switchgear are
operational. Perform a visual inspection of the breaker position indicators. Use the
switchgear schematics to identify the breakers.
G. Check Utility Current-sensing Circuit

for 1 A units.
H. Check Generator Set Bus Current-sensing Circuit

for 1 A units.
19.3.18 Code 1444 - Generator Set Bus Overload

This code depends on Genset Bus kW Overload Detection Method.
198
A029Y787 (Issue 1)
5-2012
19. Troubleshooting
TABLE 127.
Value
GENSET BUS KW OVERLOAD DETECTION METHOD

Description
kW Only
The generator set load is more than Genset Bus %kW Overload Threshold for
more than Genset Bus kW Overload Delay.
Frequency Only
The generator set frequency is less than Genset Bus Underfrequency Overload
Threshold for more than Genset Bus Underfrequency Overload Delay.
Both kW and Frequency
At least one of the other conditions is true.

If load demand is active, load demand becomes inactive. Any generator sets that have stopped
due to load demand are restarted.
If load add/shed is active, automatic load add and manual load add are interrupted, and load
add/shed starts removing loads based on load-shed levels. The loads are removed using the
same load shed sequence that automatic load shed uses. It does not matter if automatic load
shed is active.
A. Verify Generator Set Bus Overload Parameters

Verify the generator set bus overload parameters are set correctly. Disconnect the J14
connector from the MCM3320, and connect InPower to the MCM3320. Access Adjustments
> Genset Bus Overload Adjustments.
Genset Bus Overload Method
%KW Overload Threshold
KW Overload Delay
Underfrequency Overload Delay
Underfrequency Overload Threshold
B. Verify System Load Add Parameter

Verify the System Load Add parameter is configured correctly. Make sure the system load
does not exceed the generating capacity of the generator sets in the system.
Access the following settings:
Adjustments > Load Control Setup Adjustments > Genset Bus KW Setpoint
Monitor > Genset Bus Overload > Genset Bus Overload Status
C. Check Utility Availability

Determine whether the utility has failed. If it has, wait for power to be restored and become
stable.
D. Check kW Settings
Determine whether the generator set kW settings should be adjusted because the
generator set is installed at a high altitude. Refer to the generator set service manual for
details.
A029Y787 (Issue 1)
199
19. Troubleshooting
5-2012
E. Verify Generator Set Ratings

Verify that the Gen KW Rating of the generator sets in the system are set up correctly in
the MCM3320. Disconnect the J14 connector from the MCM3320, and connect InPower to
the MCM3320. Go to Adjustments > System Setup > Genset (s) KW Rating.
F. Troubleshoot Generator Set Related Fault Codes

Check for faults on the generator sets, and troubleshoot them. Refer to the generator set
service manual.
19.3.19 Code 1452 - Generator Set Main Breaker Fail to Close

(Isolated Bus Without Generator Set Main Breaker or
Common Bus)
The generator sets are expected to close to the generator set bus, but none of the paralleling
breakers closed within Virtual Gen Main Fail to Close Delay.
This cannot be generated in Manual mode.

The generator sets are not available in three-phase applications.
A. Check Generator Set Paralleling Breaker Status

Check the status of the paralleling breaker at the switchgear by checking the breaker
position indicator and the trip indicator/lock out relay. Proceed based on what you find:
If the paralleling breaker is still open after receiving the close command from the
MCM3320, continue with verifying the generator set controller mode.
If the paralleling breaker is actually closed after receiving the close command from the
MCM3320, but this fault code has been generated, continue with checking the
paralleling breaker close circuit.
B. Verify Generator Set Controller Mode

Verify the generator set controls are in Auto mode; otherwise, a start signal from the
MCM3320 will be ignored, and this fault code will be generated. Also verify that no
shutdown faults are currently active on the generator set controls.
C. Verify Generator Set Paralleling Breaker Functionality

Verify the paralleling breaker is not locked out or tagged out.
D. Check Paralleling Breaker Close Circuit

Check the wiring in the paralleling breaker close circuit by checking for continuity between
the points listed below.
TB3-8 (MCM3320) and the corresponding terminal in the switchgear
200
A029Y787 (Issue 1)
5-2012
19. Troubleshooting
E. Check Control Voltage

Verify there is control voltage in the generator set paralleling breaker close circuit and the
paralleling breaker UVR. Check for control voltage at the switchgear terminals that power
up the close coil of the breaker. Refer to the switchgear and breaker schematics.
F. Verify Operation of Breaker Close Coil

Verify the operation of the circuit breaker close coil. Make sure the close coil actually
closes the breaker when energized. This can be done by connecting power across the
terminals of the breaker close coil. Refer to the breaker schematics or breaker manual for
details.
19.3.20 Code 1452 - Generator Set Main Breaker Fail to Close

(Isolated Bus with Generator Set Main Breaker or Transfer
Pair)
A close command was sent to the generator set main breaker, but the breaker did not close
within Gen CB Fail to Close Delay.

The generator sets are not available in three-phase applications.
A. Check Generator Set Main Breaker Status

Check the status of the generator set main breaker at the switchgear by checking the
breaker position indicator and the trip indicator/lock out relay. Proceed based on what you
find:
If the generator set main breaker is still open after receiving the close command from
the MCM3320, continue with checking the spring charge mechanism.
If the generator set main breaker is actually closed after receiving the close command
from the MCM3320, but this fault code has been generated, continue with checking
the control voltage in the generator set main breaker close circuit.
B. Check Spring Charge Mechanism

Verify the spring charge mechanism of the breaker is operational by performing the
following steps.
1. Check the spring charge indicator of the breaker and determine whether the spring
coil is fully charged. If the spring coil is discharged, it can be confirmed that the spring
charging motor is not charging up the spring coil or the spring coil is bad.
2. Check for control voltage at the spring charging motor. Refer to the breaker
schematics/service manual to determine the cause if there is no control voltage.
3. Manually charge the spring coil by using the spring charging handle.
If the manual charge is successful, the breaker will open and close as
commanded.
A029Y787 (Issue 1)
201
19. Troubleshooting
5-2012
If the manual charge is not successful, the breaker will not change status. Refer
to the breaker schematics/service manual and replace the spring coil. Contact
the breaker manufacturer and distributor regarding the fix (this is required).
C. Check Auxiliary Breaker Position Contacts

Verify auxiliary position contacts 'a' and 'b' are operational by performing the following
steps.
1. Remove existing wires from TB10-1 and TB10-2.
2. Perform a continuity check on both 'a' and 'b' contacts at the breaker.
3. Obtain permission from the facility or customer to interrupt the power supply to the
site.
4. Cycle power to the breaker to make sure the auxiliary contacts change their respective
states with the change in breaker status from open to closed or closed to open.
If the auxiliary contacts do not change states, the breaker is faulty, and it must be
fixed or replaced. Contact the manufacturer, distributor, and electrical contractor to
resolve the problem. Cummins technicians are not responsible for troubleshooting a
faulty circuit breaker.
D. Check Control Voltage

Verify there is control voltage in the generator set main breaker close circuit. Check for
control voltage at the switchgear terminals that power up the close coil of the breaker.
Refer to the switchgear and breaker schematics.
E. Check Generator Set Main Breaker Close Circuit

Check the wiring in the generator set main breaker close circuit by checking for continuity
between the following contacts:
F. Verify Generator Set Main Breaker Components

Verify the components in the close circuit are operating properly by performing the
following steps.
Obtain permission from the facility to interrupt power to the site. Verify operation of the
breaker close coil by jumpering power across the terminals of the breaker close coil and
making sure it actually closes the breaker when energized. Refer to the breaker
schematics/service manual for details.
Make sure this check is performed in a safe manner so as to avoid damaging electrical
equipment. For example, if generator sets are on the bus, the utility breaker must not be
closed.
202
A029Y787 (Issue 1)
5-2012
19. Troubleshooting
G. Verify Time Delay Setting

Verify the setting for the Fail to Close Time Delay in the generator set main breaker is
based on the breaker specifications. Check the breaker service manual for details and use
InPower to check the setting. Disconnect the J14 connector from the MCM3320, and
connect InPower to the MCM3320. Access Adjustments > Breaker Adjustments > Genset
Main Breaker Adjustments > Gen CB Fail to Close Delay.
19.3.21 Code 1453 - Generator Set Main Breaker Fail to Open

Common Bus)
An open command was sent to the generator set paralleling breakers, but at least one of the
paralleling breakers remained closed for Virtual Gen Main Fail to Open Delay.
This cannot be generated in Manual mode.

When PTC State is Genset Connected, the synchronizer cannot start, and the utility cannot
connect to the loads.
If Fail to Disconnect Enable is Enabled and PTC State is Paralleled, the utility is disconnected
immediately. (This effect ends when the conditions that caused the code are no longer true. The
fault does not have to be reset.)
Code 1453 can generate code 1121 (Fail to Disconnect).
A. Check GN Breaker Open Circuit

Check the wiring in the generator set paralleling breaker open circuit by checking for
continuity between the points listed below.
B. Check Control Voltage

Verify there is a signal in the generator set paralleling breaker open coil. Check for control
voltage at the switchgear terminals that power the open coil of the GN circuit breaker.
Refer to the switchgear and breaker schematics for the interconnections.
C. Verify Operation of Breaker Open Coil

Verify the operation of the generator set paralleling breaker open coil. Make sure the
breaker open coil actually opens the breaker when energized. This can be done by
jumpering power across the terminals of the breaker open coil. Refer to the breaker
To perform this check, the technician requires the permission from the facility. This check
must be done in a safe manner to avoid damaging electrical equipments. For example, if
generator sets are on the bus, the utility breaker must not be closed.
A029Y787 (Issue 1)
203
19. Troubleshooting
5-2012
19.3.22 Code 1453 - Generator Set Main Breaker Fail to Open

(Isolated Bus with Generator Set Main Breaker or Transfer
Pair)
An open command was sent to the generator set main breaker, but the breaker did not open
within Gen CB Fail to Open Delay.

When PTC State is Genset Connected, the synchronizer cannot start, and the utility cannot
connect to the loads.
If Fail to Disconnect Enable is Enabled and PTC State is Paralleled, the utility is disconnected
immediately. (This effect ends when the conditions that caused the code are no longer true. The
fault does not have to be reset.)
A. Check Breaker Status

Check the breaker position indicator and the trip indicator/lock out relay.
If the breaker is still closed after receiving the open command from the MCM, check
the spring charge mechanism.
If the breaker is actually open after receiving the open command from the MCM,
check the control voltage in the breaker open circuit.

Verify the spring charge mechanism of the breaker is operational by performing the
following steps.
commanded.

steps.
1. Remove existing wires from TB10-1 and TB10-2.
site.
204
A029Y787 (Issue 1)
5-2012
19. Troubleshooting
D. Check Generator Set Main Breaker Open Circuit

Check for a signal in the generator set main breaker open circuit.
E. Check Control Voltage

1. Check for control voltage at the switchgear terminals that power up the open coil of
the generator set main breaker. Refer to the switchgear and breaker schematics.
2. Check for continuity in the wiring of the generator set main breaker open circuit. Verify
that there is continuity in the wires running from the MCM3320 to the generator set
main breaker in the switchgear and back from the generator set main breaker to the
MCM3320.
F. Verify Generator Set Main Breaker Components

Verify that the components in the generator set main breaker open circuit are operating
properly.
Verify the operation of the generator set main breaker open coil. Make sure the breaker
open coil actually opens the breaker when energized. This can be done by jumpering
power across the terminals of the breaker open coil. Refer to the breaker
To perform this check, the technician requires the permission from the facility. This check
must be done in a safe manner so as to avoid damaging electrical equipments. For
example, if generator sets are on the bus, the utility breaker must not be closed.

Verify the setting for the Fail to Open Time Delay in the generator set main breaker is
based on the breaker specifications. Check the breaker manual for details. Disconnect the
J14 connector from the MCM3320, and connect InPower to the MCM3320. Access
Adjustments > Breaker Adjustments > Genset Main Breaker Adjustments > Gen CB Fail to
Open Delay.
19.3.23 Code 1454 - Generator Set Main Breaker Position Contact

This code depends on Genset Breaker Position Contacts.
TABLE 128.
Value
GENSET BREAKER POSITION CONTACTS
Description
Single Contact (a)
The generator set main breaker is open, but there was at least 5% current in all
phases for 2 seconds.
Dual Contact (a/b)
The generator set main breaker position contacts do not agree about the position of
the generator set main breaker for 2 seconds.
A029Y787 (Issue 1)
205
19. Troubleshooting
5-2012
In Manual mode, the generator set main breaker is treated as a single-contact breaker.
NOTE:
Before troubleshooting this code, the system should be in Manual mode, and
the generator sets should be in Off mode.
19.3.23.1 Associated Pins and Expected Values

Expected values are based on a measurement between the indicated pin and a discrete input
return, such as TB10-4.
TABLE 129.
BREAKER POSITION AND EXPECTED VALUES OF BREAKER POSITION CONTACTS
Breaker Position
TB10-1 (Position A)
TB10-2 (Position B)
Open
Open
Closed
Closed
Closed
Open

The utility cannot connect to the loads.
If the topology is Isolated Bus with Generator Set Main Breaker or Transfer Pair, the generator
sets are not available in three-phase applications if the generator set main breaker is a dualcontact breaker and Genset Current Based Breaker Position is Unknown.
If the generator set main breaker is a dual-contact breaker, the generator set main breaker is
considered closed, and the generator sets are considered connected to the loads.
If Genset Current Based Breaker Position is Closed, the MCM generates a retransfer inhibit.
A. Check Contact Status

Check position A and position B of the generator set main breaker.
NOTE:
For single-contact breakers, check position A only.
1. Open a monitor window and drag Gen CB Position A SW and Gen CB Position B Sw
to the monitor window.
2. Enable monitoring in InPower.
If Position A is bad, troubleshoot contact A.
If Position B is bad, troubleshoot contact B.
B. Verify Position Contact 'b'

Verify the generator set main breaker position contact 'b' using InPower. Disconnect the
J14 connector from the MCM3320, and connect InPower to the MCM3320. Access Monitor
> Switch Inputs > Genset CB Position B Sw.
If position contact 'b' is not in line with the generator set main breaker (i.e., it is open when
the generator set main breaker is closed, or closed when the generator set main breaker is
open), check the position contact 'b' wiring.
206
A029Y787 (Issue 1)
5-2012
19. Troubleshooting
C. Check Contact 'b' Wiring

1. Disconnect terminal block TB10 (MCM3320).
2. Check for continuity between TB10-2 (MCM3320) and the corresponding terminal in
the switchgear.
the switchgear.
Use the interconnect and switchgear schematics to determine the switchgear terminal.
D. Verify Position Contact 'a'

Verify the generator set main breaker position contact 'a' using InPower. Disconnect the
> Switch Inputs > Genset CB Position A Sw.
If position contact 'a' is not in line with the generator set main breaker (i.e., it is open when
the generator set main breaker is open, or closed when the generator set main breaker is
closed), check the position contact 'a' wiring.
E. Check Contact 'a' Wiring

the switchgear.
the switchgear.
F. Power Cycle the Generator Set Main Breaker

Make sure the breaker position contacts are changing states according to the standard
operational logic by performing the following steps.
1. Obtain permission from facility management to interrupt power to the facility.
2. Put the system in Manual mode.
3. Power cycle the generator set main breaker.
19.3.24 Code 1455 - Utility Main Breaker Position Contact

Isolated Bus with Generator Set Main Breaker)
There is a problem with the utility main breaker position contact inputs. These contact inputs,
namely TB14-U1-05 and TB14-U1-07, must be hard-wired (jumpered) to indicate to the
MCM3320 that the utility main breaker is open. Otherwise, the fault will become active.

The generator set main breaker cannot close.
The generator set paralleling breakers are not allowed to close, but they can remain closed if
they were already closed.
A029Y787 (Issue 1)
207
19. Troubleshooting
5-2012
If the topology is Common Bus or Transfer Pair, the utility is not available in three-phase
applications if the utility main breaker is a dual-contact breaker and Utility Current Based
Breaker Position is Unknown.
If the utility main breaker is a dual-contact breaker, the utility main breaker is considered closed,
and the utility is considered connected to the loads.
If Utility Current Based Breaker Position is Closed, the MCM generates a transfer inhibit.
A. Verify Jumper Connection

There may be no jumper present on the utility main breaker 'b' contact between TB10-8
and TB10-9. Use InPower to monitor the breaker position contact status. Disconnect the
> Switch Inputs, and then access the following options:
Utility CB Position A Switch
Utility CB Position B Switch
Review the status of each contact and make sure the status of the CB position inputs
matches the connection.
B. Verify No Improper Jumper Connection

A jumper may be incorrectly connected to the utility main breaker 'a' contact input. Make
sure no such jumper connection exists between TB10-7 and TB10-8.
19.3.25 Code 1455 - Utility Main Breaker Position Contact

(Common Bus or Transfer Pair)
This code depends on Utility Breaker Position Contacts.
TABLE 130.
Value
UTILITY BREAKER POSITION CONTACTS
Description
Single Contact (a)
The utility main breaker is open, but there was at least 5% current in all phases for
2 seconds.
Dual Contact (a/b)
The utility main breaker position contacts do not agree about the position of the
utility main breaker for 2 seconds.
In Manual mode, the utility main breaker is treated as a single-contact breaker.
19.3.25.1 Associated Pins and Expected Values

Expected values are based on a measurement between the indicated pin and a discrete input
return, such as TB10-8.
TABLE 131.
208
BREAKER POSITION AND EXPECTED VALUES OF UTILITY BREAKER POSITION

CONTACTS
Breaker Position
TB10-7 (Position A)
TB10-9 (Position B)
Open
Open
Closed
Closed
Closed
Open
A029Y787 (Issue 1)
5-2012
19. Troubleshooting

The generator set main breaker cannot close.
The generator set paralleling breakers are not allowed to close, but they can remain closed if
they were already closed.
If the topology is Common Bus or Transfer Pair, the utility is not available in three-phase
applications if the utility main breaker is a dual-contact breaker and Utility Current Based
Breaker Position is Unknown.
If the utility main breaker is a dual-contact breaker, the utility main breaker is considered closed,
and the utility is considered connected to the loads.
If Utility Current Based Breaker Position is Closed, the MCM generates a transfer inhibit.
A. Check Contact Status

Check position A and position B of the utility main breaker.
NOTE:
For single-contact breakers, check position A only.
1. Open a monitor window and drag Util CB Position A SW and Util CB Position B Sw to
the monitor window.
2. Enable monitoring in InPower.
If Position A is bad, troubleshoot contact A.
If Position B is bad, troubleshoot contact B.
B. Verify Position Contact 'b'

Verify the utility main breaker position contact 'b' using InPower. Disconnect the J14
connector from the MCM3320, and connect InPower to the MCM3320. Access Monitor >
Switch Inputs > Utility CB Position B Sw.
If position contact 'b' is in line with the standard logic (i.e., it is open when the utility
main breaker is closed, or closed when the utility main breaker is open), continue with
verifying position contact 'a.'
If position contact 'b' is not in line with the standard logic, continue with checking
position contact 'b' wiring.
C. Check Contact 'b' Wiring

the switchgear.
the switchgear.
A029Y787 (Issue 1)
209
19. Troubleshooting
5-2012
D. Verify Position Contact 'a'

Verify the utility main breaker position contact 'a' using InPower. Disconnect the J14
Switch Inputs > Utility CB Position A Sw.
If position contact 'a' is in line with the standard logic (i.e., it is open when the utility
main breaker is open, or closed when the utility main breaker is closed), continue with
power cycling the utility main breaker.
If position contact 'a' is not in line with the standard logic, continue with checking
position contact 'a' wiring.
E. Check Contact 'a' Wiring

the switchgear.
the switchgear.
F. Power Cycle the Utility Main Breaker

Make sure the breaker position contacts are changing states according to the standard
operational logic by performing the following steps.
1. Obtain permission from facility management to interrupt power to the facility.
2. Power cycle the utility main breaker.
19.3.26 Code 1456 - Synchronizer Output Limit

The synchronizer has been trying to synchronize the generator sets with the utility by putting
voltage and/or frequency bias at extreme values (lowest, highest) for Fail to Synchronize Time.
A. Verify Fail to Synchronize Time Setting

Determine whether the Fail to Synchronize time setting is too short. Using InPower,
disconnect the J14 connector from the MCM3320, and connect InPower to the MCM3320.
Access Adjustments > Sync Check Adjustments > Fail to Synchronize Time.
B. Check Permissive Window Parameters

The sync check function monitors the generator set and system voltage, frequency, and
phase rotation to determine whether the two sources can be paralleled. Any differences in
voltage, frequency, and phase rotation between the generator set and system bus must be
smaller than the permissive window parameters.
1. Set the following parameters appropriately for the specific application using InPower.
Disconnect the J14 connector from the MCM3320, and connect InPower to the
MCM3320. Access Adjustments > Sync Check Adjustments > Permissive Window
Parameters.
210
A029Y787 (Issue 1)
5-2012
19. Troubleshooting

2. Use a phase rotation meter to verify the phase rotation of the generator sets and
system.
C. Check Load Share Lines

The load share lines are used to bias the generator sets during synchronization.
1. Verify there are no wiring errors by checking for continuity between the following
terminals:
TB9-10 (MCM3320) and the respective terminal at the generator set control
2. Verify the load share wires running from the MCM3320 to the generator set controls
are connected based on the wire numbers specified in the interconnection and base
schematics.
D. Verify Utility Voltage

Verify the utility voltage is within the synchronizer bias range. The default range is +/- 6%.
To check the voltage using InPower, disconnect the J14 connector from the MCM3320,
and connect InPower to the MCM3320. Access Adjustments > Synchronizer Adjustments >
Voltage Match Limit.
E. Verify Utility Frequency

Verify the utility frequency is within the synchronizer bias range. The default range is +/- 1
Hz. To check the value using InPower, disconnect the J14 connector from the MCM3320,
Frequency Match Limit.
19.3.27 Code 1457 - Fail to Synchronize Warning

The synchronizer is active, and the generator sets have not synchronized with the utility for Fail
to Synchronize Time.

If Fail To Sync Open Transition Retransfer Enable is Enabled, the system completes a
retransfer to the utility in Normal mode by open transition.
If Fail To Sync Lockout Enable is Enable, the synchronizer stops running and cannot run until
the fault is reset.
A. Verify Fail to Synchronize Time Setting

Determine whether the Fail to Synchronize time setting is too short. Using InPower,
disconnect the J14 connector from the MCM3320, and connect InPower to the MCM3320.
Access Adjustments > Sync Check Adjustments > Fail to Synchronize Time.
A029Y787 (Issue 1)
211
19. Troubleshooting
5-2012
B. Check Permissive Window Parameters

The sync check function monitors the generator set and system voltage, frequency, and
phase rotation to determine whether the two sources can be paralleled. Any differences in
voltage, frequency, and phase rotation between the generator set and system bus must be
smaller than the permissive window parameters.
1. Set the following parameters appropriately for the specific application using InPower.
Disconnect the J14 connector from the MCM3320, and connect InPower to the
MCM3320. Access Adjustments > Sync Check Adjustments > Permissive Window
Parameters.
2. Use a phase rotation meter to verify the phase rotation of the generator sets and
system.
C. Check Load Share Lines

The load share lines are used to bias the generator sets during synchronization.
1. Verify there are no wiring errors by checking for continuity between the following
terminals:
2. Verify the load share wires running from the MCM3320 to the generator set controls
are connected based on the wire numbers specified in the interconnection and base
schematics.
D. Verify Utility Voltage

Verify the utility voltage is within the synchronizer bias range. The default range is +/- 6%.
To check the voltage using InPower, disconnect the J14 connector from the MCM3320,
Voltage Match Limit.
E. Verify Utility Frequency

Verify the utility frequency is within the synchronizer bias range. The default range is +/- 1
Hz. To check the value using InPower, disconnect the J14 connector from the MCM3320,
Frequency Match Limit.
19.3.28 Code 1458 - Synchronizer Phase Rotation Mismatch

The synchronizer is active, and the phase rotation of the utility has not matched the phase
rotation of the generator set bus for Fail to Synchronize Time.
212
A029Y787 (Issue 1)
5-2012
19. Troubleshooting

Permissive Close Allowed is Not Allowed.
A. Check Utility Voltage Sensing Circuit

L1, TB7-1
L2, TB7-2
L3, TB7-3

L1, TB6-1
L2, TB6-2
L3, TB6-3
L1, TB6-1
L2, TB6-2
L3, TB6-3
N, TB6-4
voltage.
A029Y787 (Issue 1)
213
19. Troubleshooting
5-2012
L1 TB6-1 (MCM3320)
L2 TB6-2 (MCM3320)
L3 TB6-3 (MCM3320)
C. Verify Power Cable Connections

Verify the utility and generator set power cables are connected in the proper phase
sequence. The desired phase sequence is A-B-C or L1-L2-L3.
D. Check Utility Problem

Determine whether there is any problem with the utility power cables on the utility side,
such as a miswiring or an external utility repair that may have changed the phase rotation.
Contact the facility and respective electrical contractors to fix the phasing of the power
cables.
19.3.29 Code 1541 - Generator Set Failed to Come Online

This code is active if any of these conditions occur.
The generator sets were supposed to start, but one or more generator sets did not close
their paralleling breakers before Genset Fail Time Delay.
A generator set closed its paralleling breaker on time, but, while the generator set was
supposed to remain connected to the load, the paralleling breaker was open for at least 1
second.

The generator set that failed to come online is not included in Total Load Demand Online
Capacity.
A. Troubleshoot Generator Set Related Fault Codes

Check for faults on the generator sets, and troubleshoot them. Refer to the generator set
service manual.
B. Check Paralleling Breaker Close Operation

Verify that the generator set paralleling breaker did not fail to close physically. Perform a
visual inspection, and check the status of the breaker. Check the breaker position indicator
and the trip indicator/lock out relay status. Use the switchgear schematics to identify the
breakers. For a faulty breaker, contact the breaker manufacturer and distributor and the
respective electrical contractor to resolve the issue.
C. Check Paralleling Breaker Position Circuit

Verify the wiring from the generator set paralleling breaker to the MCM3320. Use the
MCM3320, interconnection and switchgear schematics to perform the check.
214
A029Y787 (Issue 1)
5-2012
19. Troubleshooting
For example, to verify the wiring from the paralleling breaker for Generator Set 1, check for
continuity between the following terminals.
TB10-12 (MCM3320) to the corresponding terminal at the paralleling breaker
TB10-13 (MCM3320) to the corresponding terminal at the paralleling breaker
D. Check KW Values for Nonexistent Generator Sets

Determine whether a KW value has been entered for one or more generator sets that
currently do not exist in the system. Disconnect the J14 connector from the MCM3320, and
connect InPower to the MCM3320. Access Adjustments > System Setup > Genset KW
Ratings.
E. Check Generator Set Start Circuit

Verify the functionality of the generator set start circuit by checking for continuity between
TB8-8 (MCM3320) to the corresponding terminal at the generator set control.
F. Verify Generator Set Fail Time Delay Setting

Verify that the Genset Fail Time Delay is not set too low or tight in the MCM3320.
Access Adjustments > Load Demand Adjustments > Genset Fail Time Delay.
19.3.30 Code 1689 - Real-time Clock Power Interrupt

The real-time clock has not been set after power-up, or the real-time clock lost power for at least
24 hours.
Set the real-time clock to reset this code.

The scheduler is inactive.
A. Reset Real Time Clock

Reset the time and date. Disconnect the J14 connector from the MCM3320, and connect
InPower to the MCM3320. Access System Status > MCM3320 Setup > Set Clock > Date
and Time.
19.3.31 Code 1912 - Utility Bus Loss of Phase

Utility Loss of Phase Sensor Status is Dropped-out.
19.3.31.1 Utility Loss of Phase Sensor

TABLE 132.
UTILITY LOSS OF PHASE SENSOR
Sensor enable
Utility Loss of Phase Sensor Enable is Enable

Frequency > 30 Hz

A029Y787 (Issue 1)
215
19. Troubleshooting
5-2012
Utility Loss of Phase Drop-Out Delay

A. Check Loss of Phase in Utility

Determine whether one or more phases of the utility have failed by checking for loss of
phase in the main utility lines and verifying the phase rotation of the utility. Use a phase
rotation meter or a synchronizing light to check phase rotation, and refer to the phase
rotation meter instructions for information about proper phase rotation measurement
procedures.
B. Check for Excessive Load

Verify there is uniform load in all of the three phases using InPower. Disconnect the J14
AC Metering > Power, and then access the following three options:
Utility L1 (KW)
Utility L2 (KW)
Utility L3 (KW)
C. Check Utility Voltage Sensing Circuit

L1, TB7-1
L2, TB7-2
L3, TB7-3
216
A029Y787 (Issue 1)
5-2012
19. Troubleshooting
19.3.32 Code 1913 - Generator Set Bus Loss of Phase

Genset Loss of Phase Sensor Status is Dropped-out.
19.3.32.1 Generator Set Loss of Phase Sensor

TABLE 133.
GENERATOR SET LOSS OF PHASE SENSOR
Sensor enable
Genset Loss of Phase Sensor Enable is Enable

Frequency > 30 Hz

Genset Loss of Phase Drop-Out Delay

A. Check Loss of Phase in Generator Set Bus

Determine whether one or more phases of the generator set bus have failed by checking
for loss of phase in the main generator set bus lines and verifying the phase rotation of the
generator set bus. Use a phase rotation meter or a synchronizing light to check phase
rotation, and refer to the phase rotation meter instructions for information about proper
phase rotation measurement procedures. Check the generator sets for the availability of
three phases. See the generator set service manual.

L1, TB6-1
L2, TB6-2
L3, TB6-3
L1, TB6-1
L2, TB6-2
L3, TB6-3
N, TB6-4
A029Y787 (Issue 1)
217
19. Troubleshooting
5-2012
voltage.
L1 TB6-1 (MCM3320)
L2 TB6-2 (MCM3320)
L3 TB6-3 (MCM3320)

Perform a visual inspection and verify that power cables on the load side and generator set
side are correctly connected. Make sure that there are no broken or disconnected power
cables. Use the interconnection and vendor switchgear schematics to verify the
connections.
19.3.33 Code 1914 - Utility Bus Phase Rotation

Utility Phase Rotation Sensor Status is Dropped-out.
19.3.33.1 Utility Phase Rotation Sensor

TABLE 134.
UTILITY PHASE ROTATION SENSOR
Sensor enable
Utility Phase Rotation Sensor Enable is Enable

Frequency > 30 Hz
Utility Phase Rotation <> System Phase Rotation
1 second
Utility Phase Rotation = System Phase Rotation

A. Verify Utility Phase Rotation Settings

1. Use a phase rotation meter to verify the phase rotation of the system. For proper
phase rotation measurement procedures, refer to the phase rotation meter
instructions.
218
A029Y787 (Issue 1)
5-2012
19. Troubleshooting
2. Verify the utility phase rotation settings in the MCM3320 match the phase rotation
found with the meter. Disconnect the J14 connector from the MCM3320, and connect
InPower to the MCM3320. Access Adjustments, and then access the following
options:
Power Transfer Control Adjustments > Utility Sensor Adjustments > Utility Phase
Sensor Enable
System Setup > System Phase Rotation (L1-L2-L3 should be set)
B. Check Utility Voltage Sensing Circuit

L1, TB7-1
L2, TB7-2
L3, TB7-3
19.3.34 Code 1915 - Generator Set Bus Phase Rotation

Genset Phase Rotation Sensor Status is Dropped-out.
19.3.34.1 Generator Set Phase Rotation Sensor

TABLE 135.
GENERATOR SET PHASE ROTATION SENSOR
Sensor enable
Genset Phase Rotation Sensor Enable is Enable

Frequency > 30 Hz
Genset Phase Rotation <> System Phase Rotation
1 second
Genset Phase Rotation = System Phase Rotation
A029Y787 (Issue 1)
219
19. Troubleshooting
5-2012

A. Verify Generator Set Phase Rotation Settings

1. Verify the generator set phase rotation settings in the MCM3320 are correct using
InPower. Disconnect the J14 connector from the MCM3320, and connect InPower to
the MCM3320. Access Adjustments > Power Transfer Control Adjustments > Genset
Sensor Adjustments, and then access the following options:
Genset Phase Rotation Sensor Enable
Genset Loss of Phase Sensor Enable
Genset Loss of Phase Drop-out Delay
2. Use a phase rotation meter or a synchronizing light to verify the phase rotation of the
generator sets. For proper phase rotation measurement procedures, refer to the phase
rotation meter instructions.
1. Use a phase rotation meter to verify the phase rotation of the generator sets. For
proper phase rotation measurement procedures, refer to the phase rotation meter
instructions.
2. Verify the utility phase rotation settings in the MCM3320 match the phase rotation
found with the meter. Disconnect the J14 connector from the MCM3320, and connect
InPower to the MCM3320. Access Adjustments, and then access the following
options:
Power Transfer Control Adjustments > Generator Set Sensor Adjustments >
Generator Set Phase Sensor Enable
System Setup > System Phase Rotation (L1-L2-L3 should be set)

L1, TB6-1
L2, TB6-2
L3, TB6-3
L1, TB6-1
L2, TB6-2
L3, TB6-3
N, TB6-4
220
A029Y787 (Issue 1)
5-2012
19. Troubleshooting
voltage.
L1 TB6-1 (MCM3320)
L2 TB6-2 (MCM3320)
L3 TB6-3 (MCM3320)

Perform a visual inspection and verify that power cables on the load side and generator set
side are correctly connected. Make sure that there are no broken or disconnected power
cables. Use the interconnection and vendor switchgear schematics to verify the
connections.
19.3.35 Code 1989 - kW Load Control Output Limit

While in extended parallel mode, load control has been trying to run the generator sets at the
desired kW output by putting a bias at extreme values (lowest, highest) for 60 seconds.
This code can be generated if the load control method is closed-loop.
A. Verify CT and PT Settings

Verify the CT and/or PT configuration for the utility and the generator sets are correct.
Access AC Meter Setup, and then access the following options:
Genset CT Primary Current
Utility CT Primary Current
Utility CT Secondary Current
B. Check CT Connections to Switchgear

Verify that the wire passing through the CTs in the MCM3320 are connected to the correct
terminals in the switchgear. Use the interconnect and switchgear schematics to verify the
correct wiring.
A029Y787 (Issue 1)
221
19. Troubleshooting
5-2012
C. Check Wiring for CT Sensing

Verify the CT sensing wires are run correctly through the onboard CTs in the MCM3320.
Two wires should pass through the CT hole for 1 A
One wire should pass through the CT hole for 5 A
D. Verify Generator Set Availability

Determine whether any generator set in the system is unavailable or is derated because of
a fault condition. Disconnect the J14 connector from the MCM3320, and connect InPower
to the MCM3320. Access Adjustments > Monitor > Load Demand > Gen(s) Availability
State.
E. Verify Generator Set kW Settings

Verify that the demanded kW is not exceeding the capability of the generator sets online.
Access Adjustments > System Setup > Genset(s) kW Rating.
Verify that the generator sets are set to 100% of rated power.
The generating capacity of a generator set decreases with the altitude of its installation.
Refer to the generator set service manual for the specific derated value.
F. Check Wiring KW Load Control Circuit

Check the wiring of the KW load control circuit by performing continuity checks between the
following terminals. Disconnect wires from terminals TB9-4 and TB9-6 before performing
the checks, and reconnect the wires to their respective terminals after the checks.
TB9-4 (MCM3320) and the corresponding terminal at the generator set control
Load govern shield wire
19.3.36 Code 1991 - kVAR Load Control Output Limit

While in extended parallel mode, load control has been trying to run the generator sets at the
desired kVAR output by putting a bias at extreme values (lowest, highest) for 60 seconds.
This code can be generated if the load control method is closed-loop.
A. Verify CT and PT Settings

Verify the CT and/or PT configuration for the utility and the generator sets are correct.
Access AC Meter Setup, and then access the following options:
222
A029Y787 (Issue 1)
5-2012
19. Troubleshooting
Utility CT Primary Current

Utility CT Secondary Current
B. Verify Generator Set Availability

Determine whether any generator set in the system is unavailable or is derated because of
a fault condition. Disconnect the J14 connector from the MCM3320, and connect InPower
to the MCM3320. Access Adjustments > Monitor > Load Demand > Gen(s) Availability
State.
C. Verify Generator Set kVAR Settings

Verify that the demanded KVAR is not exceeding the capability of the generator sets
online. To access the generator set KVAR settings in InPower, go to Adjustments > Load
Control Adjustments > Load Control Setup Adjustments > Genset Bus KVAR Setpoint.
In each of the generator sets, verify that the setting Load Govern kVAR Setpoint Source is
set to Analog Input.
D. Check kVAR Load Control Lines

Check wiring of the kVAR load control lines by performing continuity checks between the
following terminals. Disconnect wires from terminals TB9-5 and TB9-6 in the MCM3320
before performing the checks, and reconnect the wires to their respective terminals after
the checks.
19.3.37 Code 1999 - Maximum Parallel Time

The system is not running in extended paralleling, and the generator sets have been running in
parallel with the utility for longer than Maximum Parallel Time (TDMP).

When PTC State is Utility Connected, the generator sets cannot synchronize with the utility, and
the generator sets cannot connect to the loads.
NOTE:
Maximum Parallel Time (TDMP) and code 1999 have different effects and are
reset differently. When Maximum Parallel Time (TDMP) expires, the generator
sets are disconnected immediately, and code 1999 becomes active. The timer
resets as soon as PTC State leaves Paralleled. In contrast, code 1999
remains active until the fault is reset.
A. Verify Maximum Parallel Time Setting

Verify the maximum parallel time setting in the generator set controllers is less than the
maximum parallel time setting in the MCM3320 using InPower. Disconnect the J14
> Power Transfer Control Adjustments > Time Delay Adjustments.
The default value for the MCM3320 is 30 minutes.
A029Y787 (Issue 1)
223
19. Troubleshooting
5-2012
B. Check Wiring KW Load Control Circuit

Check the wiring of the KW load control circuit by performing continuity checks between the
following terminals. Disconnect wires from terminals TB9-4 and TB9-6 before performing
the checks, and reconnect the wires to their respective terminals after the checks.
C. Check kVAR Load Control Lines

Check wiring of the kVAR load control lines by performing continuity checks between the
following terminals. Disconnect wires from terminals TB9-5 and TB9-6 in the MCM3320
before performing the checks, and reconnect the wires to their respective terminals after
the checks.
D. Cycle Power
E. Check Calibration
19.3.38 Code 2331 - Utility Bus Under Voltage

Utility Undervoltage Sensor Status is Dropped-out.
19.3.38.1 Utility Undervoltage Sensor

224
A029Y787 (Issue 1)
5-2012
19. Troubleshooting
Time (t)
initial
t1
t1+tD
t2
Event
Sensor Status
Picked-Up

(D, Utility Undervoltage Drop-Out Percentage * Utility
Picked-Up

threshold (D) for a specified time delay (tD, Utility Undervoltage
Drop-Out Delay).
Utility Undervoltage Pick-Up Percentage).
FIGURE 91.
Dropped-Out
(shaded area)
Picked-Up
UTILITY UNDERVOLTAGE SENSOR

A. Check Utility Bus Voltage Instability

The utility voltage may be unstable. Check with the respective utility company to determine
when the unstable condition is no longer active, and wait for the utility voltage to stabilize.
B. Verify Utility Voltage Sensing Setup

C. Verify Utility Under Voltage Settings

Verify the utility under voltage settings, pick-up, drop-out, and drop-out delay are not too
tight to allow for normal source fluctuations using InPower. Disconnect the J14 connector
from the MCM3320, and connect InPower to the MCM3320. Access Adjustments > Power
Transfer Control Adjustments > Utility Sensor Adjustments > Utility Under Voltage Settings.
A029Y787 (Issue 1)
225
19. Troubleshooting
5-2012
D. Check Utility Voltage Sensing Circuit

L1, TB7-1
L2, TB7-2
L3, TB7-3
E. Verify System and Utility Voltage

Verify the system voltage matches the utility nominal voltage. Disconnect the J14
> AC Meter Setup > Utility Nominal Voltage.
F. Cycle Power
19.3.39 Code 2358 - Utility Bus Over Voltage

Utility Overvoltage Sensor Status is Dropped-out.
19.3.39.1 Utility Overvoltage Sensor

Utility Overvoltage Sensor Enable must be set to Enable.
226
A029Y787 (Issue 1)
5-2012
19. Troubleshooting
Time (t)
initial
t1
t1+tD
t2
Event
Sensor Status
Picked-Up

(D, Utility Overvoltage Drop-Out Percentage).
Picked-Up

threshold (D) for a specified time delay (tD, Utility Overvoltage
Drop-Out Delay).
Utility Overvoltage Pick-Up Percentage * Utility Overvoltage DropOut Percentage).
FIGURE 92.
Dropped-Out
(shaded area)
Picked-Up
UTILITY OVERVOLTAGE SENSOR

A. Check Utility Bus Voltage Instability

The utility voltage may be unstable. Check with the respective utility company to determine
when the unstable condition is no longer active, and wait for the utility voltage to stabilize.
B. Verify System and Utility Voltage

Verify the system voltage matches the utility nominal voltage. Disconnect the J14
> AC Meter Setup > Utility Nominal Voltage.
C. Verify Utility Over Voltage Settings

Verify the utility over voltage settings, pick-up, drop-out, and drop-out delay are not too
tight to allow for normal source fluctuations using InPower. Disconnect the J14 connector
from the MCM3320, and connect InPower to the MCM3320. Access Adjustments > Power
Transfer Control Adjustments > Utility Sensor Adjustments > Utility Over Voltage Settings.
A029Y787 (Issue 1)
227
19. Troubleshooting
5-2012
D. Verify Utility Voltage Sensing Setup

E. Check Utility Voltage Sensing Circuit

L1, TB7-1
L2, TB7-2
L3, TB7-3
F. Cycle Power
19.3.40 Code 2396 - Utility Main Breaker Fail to Close

A close command was sent to the utility main breaker, but the breaker did not close within Util
CB Fail to Close Delay.
228
A029Y787 (Issue 1)
5-2012
19. Troubleshooting

The utility is not available in three-phase applications.
In certain situations, this can also cause Permissive Close Allowed to become Not Allowed.
A. Check Utility Main Breaker Status

Check the status of the utility main breaker at the switchgear by checking the breaker
If the utility main breaker is still open after receiving the close command from the
MCM3320, continue with checking the spring charge mechanism.
If the utility main breaker is actually closed after receiving the closed command from
the MCM3320, but this fault code has been generated, continue with checking the
control voltage in the utility main breaker close circuit.

Verify the spring charge mechanism of the circuit breaker is operational by performing the
following steps.
commanded.

steps.
1. Place the MCM3320 in Manual mode, and rack out the breaker to the test position.
2. Remove existing wires from TB10-7, TB10-8, and TB10-9.
site.
A029Y787 (Issue 1)
229
19. Troubleshooting
5-2012

Verify there is control voltage in the close circuit by performing the following steps.
1. Check for control voltage in the utility main breaker close circuit. Use the interconnect
and switchgear schematics to perform this check.
2. Check for control voltage at the switchgear terminals that power the close coil of the
utility main breaker. Refer to the switchgear and breaker schematics.
E. Check Utility Main Breaker Close Circuit

Check the wiring in the close circuit by checking for continuity between the following
contacts:
Use the interconnect and switchgear schematics to perform this check.
F. Verify Utility Main Breaker Components

1. Verify that the components in the utility main breaker closed circuit are operating
properly.
2. Verify the operation of the utility main breaker close coil. Make sure the breaker close
coil actually closes the breaker when energized. This can be done by jumpering power
across the terminals of the breaker close coil. Refer to the breaker schematics/service
manual for details.
To perform this check, the technician requires permission from the facility. This check
must be done in a safe manner so as to avoid damaging electrical equipments. For
example, if generator sets are on the bus, the utility breaker must not be closed.

Verify the setting for the Fail to Close Time Delay in the utility main breaker is based on the
breaker specifications. Check the breaker service manual for details. Disconnect the J14
> Breaker Adjustments > Utility Main Breaker Adjustments > Utility CB Fail to Close Delay.
19.3.41 Code 2397 - Utility Main Breaker Fail to Open

An open command was sent to the utility main breaker, but the breaker did not open within Util
CB Fail to Open Delay.

When PTC State is Utility Connected, the synchronizer cannot start, and the generator sets
cannot connect to the loads.
If Fail to Disconnect Enable is Enabled and PTC State is Paralleled, the generator sets are
disconnected immediately. (This effect ends when the conditions that caused the code are no
longer true. The fault does not have to be reset.)
230
A029Y787 (Issue 1)
5-2012
19. Troubleshooting
A. Check Utility Main Breaker Status

Check the status of the utility main breaker at the switchgear by checking the breaker
If the utility main breaker is still closed after receiving the open command from the
MCM3320, continue with checking the spring charge mechanism.
If the utility main breaker is actually open after receiving the open command from the
MCM3320, but this fault code has been generated, continue with checking the control
voltage in the utility main breaker open circuit.

Verify the spring charge mechanism of the circuit breaker is operational by performing the
following steps.
commanded.

steps.
1. Place the MCM3320 in Manual mode, and rack out the breaker to the test position.
2. Remove existing wires from TB10-7, TB10-8, and TB10-9.
site.
A029Y787 (Issue 1)
231
19. Troubleshooting
5-2012

Verify there is control voltage in the circuit breaker open circuit by performing the following
steps.
1. Check for control voltage in the utility main breaker open circuit. Use the interconnect
and switchgear schematics to perform this check.
2. Check for control voltage at the switchgear terminals that power the open coil of the
circuit breaker. Refer to the switchgear and breaker schematics.
E. Check Utility Main Breaker Open Circuit

Check the wiring in the breaker open circuit by checking for continuity between the
following contacts:
Use the MCM3320, interconnection and switchgear schematics to perform this check.
F. Verify Utility Main Breaker Components

1. Verify that the components in the utility main breaker open circuit are operating
properly.
2. Verify the operation of the utility main breaker open coil. Make sure the breaker open
coil actually opens the breaker when energized. This can be done by jumpering power
across the terminals of the breaker open coil. Refer to the breaker schematics/service
manual for details.
To perform this check, the Techs would require permission from the facility as there
will be power interruption for a certain amount of time.

Verify the setting for the Fail to Open Time Delay in the utility main breaker is based on the
breaker specifications. Check the breaker manual for details. Disconnect the J14 connector
from the MCM3320, and connect InPower to the MCM3320. Access Adjustments > Breaker
Adjustments > Utility Main Breaker Adjustments > Utility CB Fail to Open Delay.
19.3.42 Code 2416 - Calibration Checksum

Internal data on the microprocessor has been compared and a mismatch has been found.
After a major firmware release, this may happen because a large number of new parameters
get added to the firmware and some parameters are moved to a different location to optimize
the code.
A. Cycle Power
232
A029Y787 (Issue 1)
5-2012
19. Troubleshooting
19.3.43 Code 2647 - Load Demand Setup Warning

When load demand is enabled, all of these conditions must be true.
There must be at least two generator sets.
Load Demand Threshold Method is %kW, and Load Demand Restart Percent is at least
5% higher than Load Demand Shutdown Percent. (The recommended difference is 20% or
higher in most applications.)
Load Demand Threshold Method is kW, and Load Demand Restart kW Threshold is lower
than Load Demand Shutdown kW Threshold.
Genset Fail Time Delay is less than Load Demand Initial Delay.
Genset Fail Time Delay is less than Load Demand Shutdown Delay.
This code is active if one or more conditions are not true.
A. Verify Generator Set Ratings

Verify there are at least two generator sets in the system. The generator sets must have a
non-zero kW rating. Disconnect the J14 connector from the MCM3320, and connect
InPower to the MCM3320. Go to Adjustments > System Setup > Genset (s) KW Rating.
B. Verify Generator Set Load Demand Threshold

Verify the generator set load demand threshold by performing the following steps.
1. Disconnect the J14 connector from the MCM3320, and connect InPower to the
MCM3320.
2. Determine whether the %kW threshold method or kW threshold method is being used
for this site.
3. Take the appropriate action based on which method is being used.
For %kW Method - Verify the Restart (pick-up) and Shutdown (drop-out)
percentages are at least 5% different from one another (20% is the
recommended value). Change the value as needed to fall within the guidelines.
Also, verify the value entered for Shutdown is greater than the value entered for
Restart. Access Adjustments > Load Demand Adjustments > Load Demand
Restart Percent and Adjustments > Load Demand Adjustments > Load Demand
Shutdown Percent.
For kW Method - Verify the value entered for Shutdown (drop-out) is greater than
the value entered for Restart (pick-up). Access Adjustments > Load Demand
Adjustments> Load Demand Shutdown (KW) and Adjustments > Load Demand
Adjustments > Load Demand Restart (KW).
A029Y787 (Issue 1)
233
19. Troubleshooting
5-2012
C. Verify Generator Set Fail Time Delay Setting

Verify the value entered for the Genset Fail Time Delay is lower than the value for the Load
Demand Initial Delay and the Load Demand Shutdown Delay. Use InPower to access the
settings.
1. Adjustments > Load demand Adjustments > Genset Fail Time Delay
2. Adjustments > Load Demand Adjustments > Load Demand Initial Delay
3. Adjustments > Load Demand Adjustments > Load Demand Shutdown Delay
19.3.44 Code 2648 - Remote I/O Comm Failure Warning

At least one of these conditions is met.
The MCM cannot communicate with one of the required SID or its AUX 102.
Two or more AUX 101 have the same AUX 101 device number.
One or more AUX 101 have an AUX 101 device number of 4 or higher.

No test can start, but a test can continue. PTC Operating Mode cannot become Test. If PTC
Operating Mode is already Test, there is no effect.
A. Verify AUX 101 Configuration

Verify the device number for the AUX 101 is set properly based on what is required for
usage in this unit. If necessary, use the AUX 101 Installation/Setup instructions to configure
the AUX 101 board.
B. Verify PCCNet Connections

network
network
2. Verify the proper identifier is displayed on the 7-segment display of the AUX 101
board.
3. Verify the green DS1 indicator is lit on the AUX 101 board. A green light indicates
PCCNet communication.
C. Verify Connection between AUX 101 and AUX 102

Verify there is a connection between AUX 101 and AUX 102 by performing the following
steps.
1. Make sure the 20-wire ribbon cable attached to AUX 102 is connected to connector J5
on AUX 101.
2. Make sure the 20-wire ribbon cable is fully seated.
3. Make sure there are no cuts or nicks in the ribbon cable.
234
A029Y787 (Issue 1)
5-2012
19. Troubleshooting
D. Check System Topology

E. Check Compatibility of Software Versions

Verify that the MCM3320 software version is V2.0 or later. Disconnect the J14 connector
from the MCM3320, and connect InPower to the MCM3320. Access Monitor > Controller
Information > Software Version. Update the calibration if necessary.
Verify that the AUX 101 software version is V1.48 or later. Access Monitor > Controller
Information > AUX101 Software Version. Update the calibration if necessary.
Make sure the AUX 101 and MCM3320 software versions are compatible with each other.
See Section 4.4.5 on page 52.
19.3.45 Code 2939 - Modbus Communication Failure Warning

The RS-485 connection is using Modbus, but no Modbus packets have been received for
Modbus Failure Time Delay.

If Cancel Scheduler If Modbus Fail Enable is Enabled, System Scheduler Enable is
automatically set to Disabled to disable the scheduler.
A. Check Wiring of Modbus Network

Verify the wiring is correct.
1. Verify that the Modbus connection at TB15 or J14 is tight.
2. Verify that there are no open or short circuits at TB15-3 (RS485 A) and TB15-4
(RS485 B).
3. Verify that there is 120- terminating resistor at each end of the Modbus network.
4. Verify that the shield is grounded at TB15-1 in the MCM3320.
B. Check Other Modbus Devices

1. Verify the Modbus master device is transmitting information to the MCM3320. If the
Modbus device is faulty and has stopped communication, then either repair or replace
the Modbus device. Disconnect the J14 connector from the MCM3320, and connect
InPower to the MCM3320. Access Monitor > LED Outputs > Modbus Activity LED
Status > Active.
2. If there are other Modbus devices, make sure all the devices are active and
communicating. Check the connection of the Modbus devices on the Modbus network.
Make sure the connections are correct and tight.
3. Make sure all Modbus devices are programmed/configured correctly. Refer to the
documentation for the Modbus devices.
A029Y787 (Issue 1)
235
19. Troubleshooting
5-2012
C. Check Polling Rate

Verify that the polling rate is not too fast. The MCM3320 will respond in 100 msec when
receiving a request from a master device.
D. Verify Modbus Register Mapping

Verify that the master device has the correct register map for the MCM3320.
E. Reduce Number of Devices on Network

If there are a lot of devices on the network, there may be too much traffic for
communication to reach the MCM3320. Reduce the number of devices if possible.
19.3.46 Code 3924 - Utility Reverse kW Fault

The utility load is less than Utility Reverse kW Threshold for Utility Reverse kW Time Delay.

Code 3924 can generate code 4137 (Advanced Grid Protection Fault).
A. Check Reverse kW Settings

1. Verify that Utility Total KW is greater than Utility Reverse KW Threshold. Disconnect
the J14 connector from the MCM3320, and connect InPower to the MCM3320. Access
Adjustments > Power Transfer Control Adjustments > Utility Sensor Adjustments
> Utility Total KW
Adjustments > Power Transfer Control Adjustments > Utility Sensor Adjustments
> Utility Reverse KW Threshold
2. Verify that Utility Reverse KW Time Delay is not set too tight. Use InPower to verify
the setting. Access Adjustments > Power Transfer Control Adjustments > Time Delay
Adjustments > Utility Reverse KW Time Delay.
B. Check Utility CT Wiring

1. Verify that the wire passing through the Utility CTs (CT4, CT5, and CT6) on the
MCM3320 are connected to the correct terminals in the switchgear. Use the
interconnect and switchgear schematics to verify the wiring.
2. Verify that 2 wire passes through the CT for 1 A and 1 wire pass through CT for 5 A.
19.3.47 Code 4137 - Advanced Grid Protection Fault

This feature provides a way to prevent the generator sets from exporting power to the utility.
If Advanced Grid Protection Option Enable is Enable, at least one of the following conditions is
true.
The real power provided by the system has been less than Low System Load Threshold
for Low System Load Time Delay.
Code 3924 (Utility Reverse kVAR) is active.
NOTE:
236
If code 4137 becomes active due to code 3924, you have to reset faults twice,
once to clear code 3924 and a second time to clear code 4137.
A029Y787 (Issue 1)
5-2012
19. Troubleshooting

System Scheduler Enable is automatically set to Disabled to disable the scheduler.
If the topology is Common Bus or Transfer Pair, the following changes also occur.
PTC Operating Mode cannot be Extended Parallel or Test. (If PTC Operating Mode
becomes Normal, the generator sets are disconnected from the loads.)
The generator sets are disconnected immediately if the system is executing a soft-closed
transition retransfer.
A. Troubleshoot Related Fault Codes

B. Check System Load Settings

Verify that System Load settings are correct. Disconnect the J14 connector from the
MCM3320, and connect InPower to the MCM3320. Access the following settings.
Adjustments > Power Transfer Control Adjustments > Utility Sensor Adjustments >
Utility Total KW
Adjustments > Power Transfer Control Adjustments > Genset Sensor Adjustments >
Genset Total KW
Adjustments > Power Transfer Control Adjustments > Time Delay Adjustments.
A029Y787 (Issue 1)
237
19. Troubleshooting
5-2012
238
A029Y787 (Issue 1)
20
Parts List
TABLE 136.
Description
MCM3320 base board
PART NUMBERS
Part Number
0327-1520-01
0327-1520-03 (simulator)
MCM3320 software
0326-6650
HMI 211 (operator panel)
0300-6014
HMI 211 software
0326-6796
SYNC1320 base board

SYNC1320 software
InPower Pro service tool
InPower harness
A029Y787 (Issue 1)
0327-1520-02
0326-6650
0998-0077-02 (existing user)
0998-0077-04 (new user)
0541-1199
239
20. Parts List
5-2012
240
A029Y787 (Issue 1)
21
Manufacturing Facilities
NORTH AMERICA
EMEA, CIS
ASIA PACIFIC
Cummins Power Generation Limited

1400 73rd Ave. NE
Minneapolis, MN 55432 USA

Columbus Avenue
Manston Park
Manston, Ramsgate
Kent CT12 5BF
United Kingdom

10 Toh Guan Road #07-01
TT International Tradepark
Singapore 608838
Phone +1 763 574 5000

Toll Free +1 800 888 6626
Fax +1 763 574 5298
Phone +44 1843 255000

Fax +44 1843 255902
Phone +65 6417 2388

Fax +65 6417 2399
BRAZIL
CHINA
INDIA
Rua Jati, 310, Cumbica

Guarulhos, SP 07180-900
Brazil
Cummins Power Generation

2 Rongchang East Street,
Beijing Economic Technological
Development Area
Beijing 100176, P.R.China
35A/1/2, Erandawana
Pune 411 038
India
Phone +55 11 2186 4195

Fax +55 11 2186 4729
Phone +86 10 5902 3000

Fax +86 10 5902 3199
Phone +91 020 6602 7525

Fax +91 020 6602 8090
LATIN AMERICA
MEXICO
3350 Southwest 148th Ave.

Suite 205
Miramar, FL 33027
USA
Eje 122 No. 200 Zona Industrial

San Luis Potosi, S.L.P. 78395
Mexico
Phone +1 954 431 551

Fax +1 954 433 5797
Phone +52 444 870 6700

Fax +52 444 824 0082
21.1
How to Obtain Service

When a product requires servicing, contact your nearest Cummins Power Generation distributor.
To locate your local Cummins Power Generation distributor, refer to www.cumminspower.com
and select Distributor Locator. When contacting your distributor, always supply the complete
Model, Specification, and Serial Number as shown on the nameplate.
A029Y787 (Issue 1)
241
21. Manufacturing Facilities
5-2012
242
A029Y787 (Issue 1)
Appendix A. Interconnect Drawings

Table of Contents
Figure 93. 0630-3133, Sheet 1 ................................................................................................................... 245
Figure 94. 0630-3133, Sheet 2 ................................................................................................................... 246
Figure 95. 0630-3133, Sheet 3 ................................................................................................................... 247
Figure 96. 0630-3133, Sheet 4 ................................................................................................................... 248
Figure 97. 0630-3133, Sheet 5 ................................................................................................................... 249
Figure 98. 0630-3133, Sheet 6 ................................................................................................................... 250
Figure 99. 0630-3133, Sheet 7 ................................................................................................................... 251
Figure 100. 0630-3133, Sheet 8 ................................................................................................................. 252
Figure 101. 0630-3133, Sheet 9 ................................................................................................................. 253
Figure 102. 0630-3133, Sheet 10 ............................................................................................................... 254
Figure 103. 0630-3133, Sheet 11 ............................................................................................................... 255
Figure 104. 0630-3133, Sheet 12 ............................................................................................................... 256
Figure 105. 0630-3133, Sheet 13 ............................................................................................................... 257
Figure 106. 0630-3133, Sheet 14 ............................................................................................................... 258
Figure 107. 0630-3133, Sheet 15 ............................................................................................................... 259
Figure 108. 0630-3133, Sheet 16 ............................................................................................................... 260
Figure 109. 0630-3133, Sheet 17 ............................................................................................................... 261
Figure 110. 0630-3133, Sheet 18 ............................................................................................................... 262
Figure 111. 0630-3133, Sheet 19 ............................................................................................................... 263
Figure 112. 0630-3133, Sheet 20 ............................................................................................................... 264
Figure 113. 0630-3133, Sheet 21 ............................................................................................................... 265
Figure 114. 0630-3133, Sheet 22 ............................................................................................................... 266
Figure 115. 0630-3133, Sheet 23 ............................................................................................................... 267
Figure 116. 0630-3133, Sheet 24 ............................................................................................................... 268
Figure 117. 0630-3133, Sheet 25 ............................................................................................................... 269
Figure 118. 0630-3133, Sheet 26 ............................................................................................................... 270
Figure 119. 0630-3133, Sheet 27 ............................................................................................................... 271
Figure 120. 0630-3133, Sheet 28 ............................................................................................................... 272
Figure 121. 0630-3136, Sheet 1 ................................................................................................................. 273
Figure 122. 0630-3136, Sheet 2 ................................................................................................................. 274
Figure 123. 0630-3136, Sheet 3 ................................................................................................................. 275
Figure 124. 0630-3136, Sheet 4 ................................................................................................................. 276
A029Y787 (Issue 1)
243
Appendix A.
Interconnect Drawings
NOTE:
244
5-2012
The drawings included in this section are representative. For current

complete information, refer to the drawing package that was shipped with the
unit.
A029Y787 (Issue 1)
5-2012
Appendix A.
A.1
0630-3133 (MCM3320 Interconnect Drawing)
FIGURE 93.
A029Y787 (Issue 1)
0630-3133, SHEET 1
245
Appendix A.
5-2012
FIGURE 94.
246
0630-3133, SHEET 2
A029Y787 (Issue 1)
5-2012
Appendix A.
FIGURE 95.
A029Y787 (Issue 1)
0630-3133, SHEET 3
247
Appendix A.
5-2012
FIGURE 96.
248
0630-3133, SHEET 4
A029Y787 (Issue 1)
5-2012
Appendix A.
FIGURE 97.
A029Y787 (Issue 1)
0630-3133, SHEET 5
249
Appendix A.
5-2012
FIGURE 98.
250
0630-3133, SHEET 6
A029Y787 (Issue 1)
5-2012
Appendix A.
FIGURE 99.
A029Y787 (Issue 1)
0630-3133, SHEET 7
251
Appendix A.
5-2012
FIGURE 100.
252
0630-3133, SHEET 8
A029Y787 (Issue 1)
5-2012
Appendix A.
FIGURE 101.
A029Y787 (Issue 1)
0630-3133, SHEET 9
253
Appendix A.
5-2012
FIGURE 102.
254
0630-3133, SHEET 10
A029Y787 (Issue 1)
5-2012
Appendix A.
FIGURE 103.
A029Y787 (Issue 1)
0630-3133, SHEET 11
255
Appendix A.
5-2012
FIGURE 104.
256
0630-3133, SHEET 12
A029Y787 (Issue 1)
5-2012
Appendix A.
FIGURE 105.
A029Y787 (Issue 1)
0630-3133, SHEET 13
257
Appendix A.
5-2012
FIGURE 106.
258
0630-3133, SHEET 14
A029Y787 (Issue 1)
5-2012
Appendix A.
FIGURE 107.
A029Y787 (Issue 1)
0630-3133, SHEET 15
259
Appendix A.
5-2012
FIGURE 108.
260
0630-3133, SHEET 16
A029Y787 (Issue 1)
5-2012
Appendix A.
FIGURE 109.
A029Y787 (Issue 1)
0630-3133, SHEET 17
261
Appendix A.
5-2012
FIGURE 110.
262
0630-3133, SHEET 18
A029Y787 (Issue 1)
5-2012
Appendix A.
FIGURE 111.
A029Y787 (Issue 1)
0630-3133, SHEET 19
263
Appendix A.
5-2012
FIGURE 112.
264
0630-3133, SHEET 20
A029Y787 (Issue 1)
5-2012
Appendix A.
FIGURE 113.
A029Y787 (Issue 1)
0630-3133, SHEET 21
265
Appendix A.
5-2012
FIGURE 114.
266
0630-3133, SHEET 22
A029Y787 (Issue 1)
5-2012
Appendix A.
FIGURE 115.
A029Y787 (Issue 1)
0630-3133, SHEET 23
267
Appendix A.
5-2012
FIGURE 116.
268
0630-3133, SHEET 24
A029Y787 (Issue 1)
5-2012
Appendix A.
FIGURE 117.
A029Y787 (Issue 1)
0630-3133, SHEET 25
269
Appendix A.
5-2012
FIGURE 118.
270
0630-3133, SHEET 26
A029Y787 (Issue 1)
5-2012
Appendix A.
FIGURE 119.
A029Y787 (Issue 1)
0630-3133, SHEET 27
271
Appendix A.
5-2012
FIGURE 120.
272
0630-3133, SHEET 28
A029Y787 (Issue 1)
5-2012
Appendix A.
A.2
0630-3136 (SYNC1320 Interconnect Drawing)
FIGURE 121.
A029Y787 (Issue 1)
0630-3136, SHEET 1
273
Appendix A.
5-2012
FIGURE 122.
274
0630-3136, SHEET 2
A029Y787 (Issue 1)
5-2012
Appendix A.
FIGURE 123.
A029Y787 (Issue 1)
0630-3136, SHEET 3
275
Appendix A.
5-2012
FIGURE 124.
276
0630-3136, SHEET 4
A029Y787 (Issue 1)
Appendix B. Sequence Diagrams

Table of Contents
Figure 125. Legend .................................................................................................................................... 279
Figure 126. Isolated Bus Without Generator Set Main Breaker Topology, Loss of Utility and Return of
Utility ........................................................................................................................................................... 280
Figure 127. Isolated Bus Without Generator Set Main Breaker Topology, Test .................................. 281
Figure 128. Isolated Bus with Generator Set Main Breaker Topology, Loss of Utility and Return of
Utility ........................................................................................................................................................... 282
Figure 129. Isolated Bus with Generator Set Main Breaker Topology, Test ........................................ 283
Figure 130. Common Bus Topology, Open Transition, Loss of Utility and Return of Utility ............. 284
Figure 131. Common Bus Topology, Open Transition, Test ................................................................. 285
Figure 132. Common Bus Topology, Soft-closed Transition, Loss of Utility and Return of Utility ... 286
Figure 133. Common Bus Topology, Soft-closed Transition, Test ....................................................... 287
Figure 134. Common Bus Topology, Extended Parallel ........................................................................ 288
Figure 135. Transfer Pair Topology, Open Transition, Loss of Utility and Return of Utility .............. 289
Figure 136. Transfer Pair Topology, Open Transition, Test .................................................................. 290
Figure 137. Transfer Pair Topology, Hard-closed Transition, Loss of Utility and Return of Utility ... 291
Figure 138. Transfer Pair Topology, Hard-closed Transition, Test ....................................................... 292
Figure 139. Transfer Pair Topology, Soft-closed Transition, Loss of Utility and Return of Utility .... 293
Figure 140. Transfer Pair Topology, Soft-closed Transition, Test ........................................................ 294
Figure 141. Transfer Pair Topology, Extended Parallel .......................................................................... 295
Figure 142. Load Add, Load Shed (Generator Sets Connected) ........................................................... 296
Figure 143. Utility Load Add ..................................................................................................................... 297
Figure 144. Load Demand ......................................................................................................................... 298
A029Y787 (Issue 1)
277
Appendix B.
Sequence Diagrams
5-2012
278
A029Y787 (Issue 1)
5-2012
Appendix B.
B.1
Sequence Diagrams
FIGURE 125.
A029Y787 (Issue 1)
Sequence Diagrams
LEGEND
279
Appendix B.
Sequence Diagrams
5-2012
FIGURE 126.
280
ISOLATED BUS WITHOUT GENERATOR SET MAIN BREAKER TOPOLOGY, LOSS OF UTILITY AND RETURN OF UTILITY
A029Y787 (Issue 1)
5-2012
Appendix B.
FIGURE 127.
A029Y787 (Issue 1)
Sequence Diagrams
ISOLATED BUS WITHOUT GENERATOR SET MAIN BREAKER TOPOLOGY, TEST
281
Appendix B.
Sequence Diagrams
5-2012
FIGURE 128.
282
ISOLATED BUS WITH GENERATOR SET MAIN BREAKER TOPOLOGY, LOSS OF UTILITY AND RETURN OF UTILITY
A029Y787 (Issue 1)
5-2012
Appendix B.
FIGURE 129.
A029Y787 (Issue 1)
Sequence Diagrams
ISOLATED BUS WITH GENERATOR SET MAIN BREAKER TOPOLOGY, TEST
283
Appendix B.
Sequence Diagrams
5-2012
FIGURE 130.
284
COMMON BUS TOPOLOGY, OPEN TRANSITION, LOSS OF UTILITY AND RETURN OF UTILITY
A029Y787 (Issue 1)
5-2012
Appendix B.
FIGURE 131.
A029Y787 (Issue 1)
Sequence Diagrams
COMMON BUS TOPOLOGY, OPEN TRANSITION, TEST
285
Appendix B.
Sequence Diagrams
5-2012
FIGURE 132.
286
COMMON BUS TOPOLOGY, SOFT-CLOSED TRANSITION, LOSS OF UTILITY AND RETURN OF UTILITY
A029Y787 (Issue 1)
5-2012
Appendix B.
FIGURE 133.
A029Y787 (Issue 1)
Sequence Diagrams
COMMON BUS TOPOLOGY, SOFT-CLOSED TRANSITION, TEST
287
Appendix B.
Sequence Diagrams
5-2012
FIGURE 134.
288
COMMON BUS TOPOLOGY, EXTENDED PARALLEL
A029Y787 (Issue 1)
5-2012
Appendix B.
FIGURE 135.
A029Y787 (Issue 1)
Sequence Diagrams
TRANSFER PAIR TOPOLOGY, OPEN TRANSITION, LOSS OF UTILITY AND RETURN OF UTILITY
289
Appendix B.
Sequence Diagrams
5-2012
FIGURE 136.
290
TRANSFER PAIR TOPOLOGY, OPEN TRANSITION, TEST
A029Y787 (Issue 1)
5-2012
Appendix B.
FIGURE 137.
A029Y787 (Issue 1)
Sequence Diagrams
TRANSFER PAIR TOPOLOGY, HARD-CLOSED TRANSITION, LOSS OF UTILITY AND RETURN OF UTILITY
291
Appendix B.
Sequence Diagrams
5-2012
FIGURE 138.
292
TRANSFER PAIR TOPOLOGY, HARD-CLOSED TRANSITION, TEST
A029Y787 (Issue 1)
5-2012
Appendix B.
FIGURE 139.
A029Y787 (Issue 1)
Sequence Diagrams
TRANSFER PAIR TOPOLOGY, SOFT-CLOSED TRANSITION, LOSS OF UTILITY AND RETURN OF UTILITY
293
Appendix B.
Sequence Diagrams
5-2012
FIGURE 140.
294
TRANSFER PAIR TOPOLOGY, SOFT-CLOSED TRANSITION, TEST
A029Y787 (Issue 1)
5-2012
Appendix B.
FIGURE 141.
A029Y787 (Issue 1)
Sequence Diagrams
TRANSFER PAIR TOPOLOGY, EXTENDED PARALLEL
295
Appendix B.
Sequence Diagrams
5-2012
FIGURE 142.
296
LOAD ADD, LOAD SHED (GENERATOR SETS CONNECTED)
A029Y787 (Issue 1)
5-2012
Appendix B.
FIGURE 143.
A029Y787 (Issue 1)
Sequence Diagrams
UTILITY LOAD ADD
297
Appendix B.
Sequence Diagrams
5-2012
FIGURE 144.
298
LOAD DEMAND
A029Y787 (Issue 1)
Copyright 2012 Cummins Power Generation, Inc. All rights reserved.

Cummins, the "C" logo, and "Our energy working for you." are trademarks of
Cummins Inc.

Mcm3320 Servico 2012 Ingles

Enviado por

Dados do documento

Direitos autorais

Formatos disponíveis

Compartilhar este documento

Compartilhar ou incorporar documento

Opções de compartilhamento

Você considera este documento útil?

Este conteúdo é inapropriado?

Direitos autorais:

Formatos disponíveis

Mcm3320 Servico 2012 Ingles

Enviado por

Direitos autorais:

Formatos disponíveis

Service Manual

3.9 Summary of Settings (Basic Concepts) ................................................................................

4.4.7 Summary of Monitor Points (AUX 101/102)...............................................................

5. SOURCE AVAILABILITY .............................................................................................................

6. POWER TRANSFER CONTROL (PTC) STATE .........................................................................

6.1.3 Generator Set Connections and Legacy SID Override..............................................

7. POWER TRANSFER CONTROL (PTC) OPERATING MODE ....................................................

9. GENERATOR SET CONTROL ..................................................................................................

10. LOAD CONTROL .....................................................................................................................

11. SYNCHRONIZER .....................................................................................................................

11.3.2 kVAR Load Share Protection and Voltage Match Fail...........................................

12. LOAD ADD/SHED ....................................................................................................................

13. LOAD DEMAND .......................................................................................................................

13.6.5 Restart Delay .........................................................................................................

15. MANUAL MODE .......................................................................................................................

15.12 Scheduler in Manual Mode .............................................................................................

16. MASTER SYNCHRONIZE ONLY.............................................................................................

18. COMPONENT MODE...............................................................................................................

19.2 Faults ................................................................................................................................

Maximum Parallel Time ..................................................................

20. PARTS LIST .............................................................................................................................

21. MANUFACTURING FACILITIES ..............................................................................................

APPENDIX A. INTERCONNECT DRAWINGS ...............................................................................

APPENDIX B. SEQUENCE DIAGRAMS ........................................................................................

Important Safety Instructions

Warning, Caution and Note Styles Used In This

General Safety Precautions

High Ambient Temperatures

1. Important Safety Instructions

Equipment Safety Code

Moving Parts Can Cause Severe Personal Injury Or

Electrical Shock Can Cause Severe Personal Injury

Medium Voltage Equipment (601 V to 15 kV)

1. Important Safety Instructions

Multiple Sources of Electrical Power

Do Not Tip the Equipment

1. Important Safety Instructions

This page is intentionally blank.

Training Required for Service

Tools Required for Service

About This Manual

Organization of This Manual

About the MCM3320

Codes and Standards

How to Obtain Service

Automatic Transfer Switch

Canadian Standards Association

Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol

Digital Master Control

Domain Name Server

File Transfer Protocol

International Electrotechnical Commission

Local Area Network

Master Control Module

Network Address Translation

National Electric Code

National Fire Protection Agency

Office of Statewide Health Planning and Development

Power Transfer Control

Recommended Spares List

Remote Terminal Unit

Transmission Control Protocol

Time Delay Emergency to Normal

Time Delay Maximum Parallel